Upload
cetin-oezben
View
148
Download
2
Tags:
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
DOP Serisi HMI Kullanma Klavuzu Icindekiler
Bolum 1 Giris 1-1 DOP-A Serisi Dokunmatik Operator Panelleri..........................................................1-1 1-2 Ozellikler ....................................................................................................................1-1 1-3 Model numarasi...........................................................................................................1-2 1-4 Uyari.... .......................................................................................................................1-3 Bolum 2 Scredit 'e Giris 2-1 Ekran duzenleyici Setup ..............................................................................................2-1 2-2 Ekran Duzenliyiciye Baslama......................................................................................2-5 2-3 Menu bar ve toolbar ....................................................................................................2-10 2-3-1 File ........................................................................................................................2-10 2-3-2 Edit........................................................................................................................2-29 2-3-3 View......................................................................................................................2-53 2-3-4 Element.................................................................................................................2-68 2-3-5 Screen...................................................................................................................2-88 2-3-6 Tools.....................................................................................................................2-105 2-3-7 Option...................................................................................................................2-122 2-3-8 Windows...............................................................................................................2-145 2-3-9 Help.......................................................................................................................2-164 Bolum 3 Element Fonksiyonlari 3-1 Element Nasil Secilir..................................................................................................3-1 3-2 Button Element...........................................................................................................3-3 3-3 Meter...........................................................................................................................3-23 3-4 Bar...............................................................................................................................3-27 3-4-1 Normal Bar.........................................................................................................3-27 3-4-2 Deviation Bar.....................................................................................................3-30 3-5 Pie Graph.....................................................................................................................3-34 3-6 Indicator.......................................................................................................................3-37 3-7 Data display.................................................................................................................3-42 3-8 Graph Display..............................................................................................................3-49 3-8-1 State graphic.......................................................................................................3-49 3-8-2 Animated graphic...............................................................................................3-51 3-9 Input............................................................................................................................3-53 3-10 Curve.........................................................................................................................3-59 3-11 Sampling...................................................................................................................3-65 3-12 Alarm........................................................................................................................3-73 3-13 Graphics....................................................................................................................3-76 3-13-1 Line..................................................................................................................3-76 3-13-2 Rectangle..........................................................................................................3-77 3-13-3 Circle................................................................................................................3-78 3-13-4 Polygon............................................................................................................3-78 3-13-5 Arc....................................................................................................................3-79 3-13-6 Text...................................................................................................................3-79 3-13-7 Scale.................................................................................................................3-80 3-13-8 Table.................................................................................................................3-81
Bolum 4 Macro 4-1 Macro Tipi .............................................................................................................4-2 4-2 Macro Basimi.........................................................................................................4-4 4-3 Macro Uygulamasi ................................................................................................4-20 4-4 Hata mesajlari .......................................................................................................4-56 Bolum 5 Sistem Kontrol 5-1 Kontrol Bolgesi.....................................................................................................5-2 5-2 Durum ..................................................................................................................5-6 5-3 Dahili Hafiza ........................................................................................................5-10 Ek A Yukleme A-1 Ozellikler...............................................................................................................A-1 A-2 Olculer ve Profil....................................................................................................A-5 A-3 Kurulum................................................................................................................A-10 Ek B Haberlesme B-1 Pin baglanti uclari.................................................................................................B-1-1 B-2 Yukleme kablosu .................................................................................................B-1-4 B-3 HMI ve kontrolorlar ile haberlesme ayarlari ve baglanti sekilleri........................B-1-5
1-1
BOLUM 1 GIRIS
1-1 DOP-A Serisi Dokunmatik Operator Paneli DELTA DOP-A serisini aldiginiz icin tesekkurler. Yuksek hizli donanima sahip DOP-A
serisi kullanicilara kullanisli ve kolay programlanabilir bir arayuz temin etmektedir.
1-2 Ozellikler
Destekledigi PLC Modelleri
DOP-A serisi operator panelleri icinde; Delta,Omron,Simens,Mitsubishi gibi mar- kalarin bulundugu 20'yi askin PLC modelini desteklemektedir. Sizin istekleriniz dogrul-
tusunda yeni PLC modelleri icin uygun haberlesme protokolleri internet sitemizde
surekli guncellenmektedir.
Dil Secenekleri Basitlestirilmis Cince,geleneksel Cince ve Ingilizce'nin yaninda ekran edito-
ru tum Windows® fontlarinida kullanabilmektedir.
Hizli Uygulama ve Haberlesme Makrolari uick execution and communication macro
DOP-A serisi makrolari kullanarak karisik islemleri yapilabilmekte,ayrica haberles-
e makrolari kullanilarak ozel cihazlarla comport'dan haberlesebilmek icin haberlesme
protokolleri yazilabilmektedir.
USB ile Hizli upload/download
USB Ver1.1'i kullanarak kisa surede upload/download yapilabilmektedir.
Recete
DOP-A serisi kullanicilara bircok recetenin kolayca girilip saklanabildigi microsoft
exceldekine benzer bir recete editoru sunmaktadir.(Hafiza 64K)
1-2
2 Adet PLC Baglantisi
2 COM portlu yapisi ile ayni anda iki farkli veya ayni PLC ile baglanti yapma imkani.
Cesitli kontrolor baglantisi
COM2 portu ile RS485 kullanilarak bircok controlor ile baglanti yapilabilir.
(diger cihazlar RS485'i desteklemelidir.)
On-line Simulasyon
Derlemeyi bitirdikten sonra kontrolore baglanarak PC 'den simule etme imkani
sunar.
Off-line Simulasyon
Derlemeyi bitirdikten sonra programi direk PC ile simule etme imkani sunar.(Kontrolora gerek duymaz)
SMC Kart ile Yedekleme
Bilgisayar kullanmadan SMC karta download edilebilir veya SMC karti baska
bir HMI 'ya takarak kopyalanabilir. Gecmis bilgileri ve alarm kayitlari SMC kartta
saklanip kart okuyucuyla okunup print edilebilir.
Bircok Guvenlik Korumasi
Password secenekleri ile programlayicinin yazdiklarini koruma ve makina
kullaniminda kullanici izin seviyelerini ayarlama imkani sunar.
1-3 Model numarasi
1-3
Giris gucu
DOP A 57 GS T D -
D: DCA: ACArayuz TipiT: Sadece dokunmatikK:Dokunmatik ve Tuslu
Panel TipiGS: STN GriCS: STN renkliTC: TFT renkli
Panel Olculeri57: 5.7"75: 7.5"10: 10.4"
A: A series ~ USB, RS-232, RS-485, RS-422
Delta Operator Panel
Seri
Urun Adi
1-4 Uyari
Cevresel faktorler (sicaklik ve nem)
Net bir goruntu elde etmek icin parlaklik ve kontrast ayarini asagidaki ortam ko-
sullarina gore yapiniz. Eger uygulama sinirlarin disinda ise,uzun sure sonunda ekran
degisken tonlarda gorunmeye baslayacaktir.
Uygulama cevresel sicakligi: 0 ºC to 50 ºC (32 ºF to 122 ºF) Bagil nem: 10% ~ 90%
SMC Kart
SMC karti datalari saklamak ve tasimak icin kullanilabilir. Yalnizca; HMI tarafindan
formatlanmis SMC karti hem HMI 'da hemde Windows® OS sisteminde kullanila-
bilir.(SMC kart bazi farkli formatlarlada yazilip okunabilir fakat bazi problemlerle
karsilasilabilir)
Uygulama esnasinda Comport'a kabloyu takip cikarmayin!
Lutfen enerjiyi kestikten comport baglantimizi sokelim veya takalim.
Tavsiye edilen sistem gereksinimleri Pentium III, 500MHz veya ustu 256MB RAM Windows® 2000 & 98
2-1
Bolum 2 Scredit 'e Giris
2-1 Scredit Setup
Bu bolumde ekran duzenleyicinin genel olarak ozellikleri anlatilacaktir.
Ilerleyen bolumlerde bu programin detaylari anlatilacaktir.
n Minimum hardware gereksinimleri 1. 80486 veya ustu PC 2. 16 MB RAM
3. 10 MB bos hard disk alani 4. VGA or super VGA monitor. Windows 'da ekran renk ayarlarini 256 renk veya
ustune ayarlayiniz.5. Windows uyumlu mouse.
6. Windows uyumlu printer.
n Software yuklemesiDelta HMI Sc reen Editor setup 'ina baslamak icin, lutfen asagidaki stepleri takip ediniz.
1.Adim: Lutfen PC 'nizde Win98 /NT/XP/2000 sistemlerinden birini calistirin. (Sek. 2-1-1 )
Sekil. 2-1-1 Microsoft Windows baslatin
2-2
2.Adim: Kurulum CD 'sini CD ROM 'a takin ve setup.exe 'yi calistirin. click Start > Calistir. ( Fig. 2 -1 -2)
Not : Eger kurulum sirasinda calisan baska programlar varsa lutfen onlari kapatin
Sekil. 2 -1 -2 Windows 'un altinda setup.exe 'in calistirilmasi3.Adim: OK bastiktan sonra setup baslayacaktir.Gelen d'alog kutularini takip e-
derek kuruluma devam edin ve kurulumun yapilacagi yeri secin.
Default klasoru sectikten sonra C: \Program file \Delta\Screen editor , click Next>. Setup islemi sonucunda Program secilen klasore kurulmus olacaktir.
Defult klasorunden baska bir klasor secmek icin , click Browse ... Ekrana gelen
klasorler icinden istediginiz bir tanesini icine Delta HMI scredit programini kurmak icin secin ve OK ' e daha sonra Next>
Eger gerekirse, Back tusu ile adimlari tek tek geri alabilirsiniz.
2-3
Sekil 2-1-3 Screen editor kurulumu icin klasor secimi
4.Adim: Bu dialog kutucugunda dili secebilirsiniz: Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese veya English.Daha sonra N ext> basarak
diger adimlara gecilebilir.
Sekil. 2-1-4 Dil secimi5.Adim: Bu adimda gelen dialog kutucugu gerekli dosyalarin sisteminize yuklen-
digini gosterecektir (Sekil 2-1-5 ve Sekil 2-1-6)
2-4
Sekil. 2 -1-5 Screen editor yuklenmesi
Sekil. 2-1-6 Screen editoru yuklemeyi bitirStep 6: Artik kurulum islemini bitirebilirsiniz. Lutfen islemi sonlandirmak icin Finish
tusuna basin. (Sekil 2 -1 -7)
Sekil 2 -1 -7 Yuklemeden cikis
2-5
7.Adim: OK basip setup'in bilgisayarinizi restart yapmasini bekleyin.Aksi tak-
de “No, I will restart my computer later" a basin. Fakat Delta HMIscredit programini kullanmak icin bir defa restart yapmaniz gerektigini unut-
mayin.
2-2 Scredit 'e Baslama
Setup 'un sonra,Scredit 'i acmak icin su adimlari takip edin; click Start >
Programs > Delta HMI > Screen Editor. Sekil 2 -2 -1)
Sekil 2-2-1
Sekil 2 -2-2 Baslangic displayi
Screen editor 'e basladiginizda ,
1. Eger enviorement menusunden "auto open last file automatically" sec
2-6
tiyseniz son actiginiz program otomatik olarak acilacaktir.
2. Eger “auto open last file automatically” isaretlemdiyseniz veya son calisma-
nizi saklamadiysaniz, sekildeki gibi acilacaktir. (Sekil 2-2 -3)
Sekil 2-2-3 Sayfa acilmamis ekranYeni dosya actiktan sonra sekil 2-2-4 gozuken Screen editor sayfasi acilacaktir
2-7
Sekil. 2 -2 -4 Screen editor 'de yeni dosya sayfasi
Screen editor uygulama sayfasi asagida anlatilan 5 bolumden olusmaktadir.
n Menu bar 8 farkli fonksiyon icermektedir.
n Toolbar Toolbar; Windows® programindaki gibidir,yerlerini siz belirliyebilirsiniz.
1. Standard toolbar
2. Zoom toolbar
3. Text toolbar
4. Upper-level planning toolbar
5. Lower-level planning toolbar
2-8
Sekil 2-2-5
Sekil 2 -2 -6
Menu bar
Property tablosu
Output tablosu
Standart toolbar
Element toolbar
Zoom toolbar Text toolbar
Status bar
Element listesi
Konum
Text toolbar
Element toolbar
Standart
toolbar
Zoom toolbar
Property tablosu
Output sayfasiMenu bar
Alt sira
planlama toolbar
Ust sira
planlama toolbar
Ust sira
planlama toolbar
Alt sira
planlama toolbar
2-9
n Element ozellik (property) tablosu
Secilen nesnenin ozelliklerini ayarlamak icin kullanilir.(bkz.Bolum3)
Fig. 2-2-7 Property tablosu Fig. 2-2 -8 Pro perty listesi
Sekil 2 -2-9 Durum
n Output Penceresi Ekranda yapilan isler ayric compile isleminden sonraki mesajlar burda
gozukur. Yazilan program compile edilirken Scredit otomatik olarak hatalari
denetler. Bir hata buldugunda ilgili hataya ait mesaj output window 'da go- runtulenir. Kullanici hata mesajina tiklayarak hatali elementi gorebilir.
Fig. 2-2-10 Output sayfasi
Calisma (Work) bolgesiProgramin yapildigi bolgedir.(buton,grafik.sekil).Guzel bir calisma icin asagidaki ornekleri takip edin.(Sekil 2 -2-11 ).
Fig. 2-2-8
Fig. 2-2-9
2-10
Sekil 2 -2-11 Screen editor uygulamasinin genel gorunusu.
2-3 Menu bar ve toolbar
Screen editor 'un icedigi araclarin oldugu toolbarlardir ( resim,recete,display araclari)Menu toolbar asagidaki secenekleri icirir.
2-3-1 File
Calisma bolgesi
2-11
Fig. 2-3-1 Dosya secenekleriYeni bir dosya acmak.
: Yeni bir dosya acmak icin New butonuna basin.
, File> New Sekil 2 -3-2 'deki gibi,veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl+N 'e basin.
Sekil 2-3-2 Menu bar 'dan yeni dosya acmak
Aplication edition
Upload files
Print function
Exit Screen editor
Last file path
Password pr otect
Export a file
Download firmware
2-12
Sekil 2-3 -3 Toolbar 'dan yeni dosya acmak
Yeni dosyayi sectikten sonra ekrana gelen Sekil 2-3-4 'deki dialog kutucuguna uygulamaismi,sayfa ismi,sayfa ID ve HMI tipini yazmaliyiz.
Sekil 2-3-4 Yeni uygulama dialog kutucuguEger bir uygulama uzerinde calisirken baska bir uygulama acmak istiyorsaniz asagidaki
gibi size uygulamanizi saklamanizi hatirlatan bir dialog kutucugu belirecektir.
Yeni calisma
2-13
Sekil 2-3-5 Uygulama saklama dialog kutucugu
Eski bir uygulama acmak
: Varolan bir uygulamayi acmak icin Open secin
, File> Open (Sekil2-3-7) veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl+O 'a basin
Sekil 2-3-6 Menu bardan acmak
Open old application
2-14
Sekil 2-3 -7 Toolbardan acmak
Bu sirada uzerinde calistiginiz uygulamyi saklamaniz icin bir hatirlatici kutucuk acilir sakladiktan sonra sekildeki pencere belirir (Sekil 2-3-8)
Sekil2-3-8 Varolan uygulamayi acmak
Dosyayi kapatmak
Varolan dosyayi acmak
2-15
: Dosyayi kapatmak icin File > Close Sekil 2-3-9
Sekil 2-3-9 Uygulamayi kapat
Eger uygulama kapatilmadan once saklanmadiysa asagidaki dialog kutucugu belirir. Sekil 2 -3-10) ve size saklamaniz gerektigini hatirlatir.
Sekil 2 -3 -10 Saklama dialog kutucugu
Sakla:
Calismalarinizi saklamak icin , basin veya File > Save Sekil 2 -3 -11 , veya
klavye kisayollari Ctrl + S 'e basin.
Uygulamayi kapat
2-16
Sekil 2-3-11 Menu bardan secim
Sekil 2-3-12 Toolbardan secimi
Farkli Kaydet:
: Varolan uygulamayi baska bir isimde saklamak için File > Save As 'e basin(Sekil 2-3-13). Ekrana sekil 2-3-14 'deki gibi; yeni uygulama-nin ismini yazmak için bir kutucuk gelecektir.
Save
Save application
2-17
Sekil 2-3-13 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-3-14 Uygulama ismi girme kutucuguExport
: Resim formatindaki datalari (bmp dosyalarini) export
etmek için basin (Sekil 2-3-16), veya File > Export seçin (sekil 2 -3 -15) ,
klavye kisayolu Ctrl+E yollarini kullanin.
Save as other application
2-18
Sekil 2-3-15 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-3-16 Toolbardan secimi
Export
Export
2-19
Sekil 2 -3 -17 Dosyayi export ettikten sonra
Ekrani ve Receteyi Upload etme:
: File > Upload sectikten sonra (Sekil 2-3 -18),sifreyi gir-mek zorundasiniz. (Sifre HMI 'da en yuksek oncelige sahiptir) Gelen dialog kutucu- na (Sekil 2-3-14). uygulamanin ismini yazdiktan sonra sekil 2-3-19 'daki dialog kutucugu
belirir ve Upload islemi baslar. Upload islemini tkip edebilir veya stop tusuna basarak dur-durabilirsiniz. Uplad ettiginiz dosya otomatik olarak HMI formatina donecektir ve orjinali
bozulamdan acilabilecektir.
2-20
Sekil 2 -3-18 Menu bardan Ekrani ve Receteyi Upload etme
Sekil 2-3-19 Ekran ve recete Upload goruntusu
Upload screen and recipe
2-21
Upload reçete
: Bu secenek Upload ile ayni isleve sahiptir fakat yal-nýzca reçeteyi upload eder. Receteyi cekmek için sifreye ihtiyac vardir.
Sekil 2 -3-20 Upload reçete
Download firmware
: HMI ' 'yi upgrade etmeye veya islev eklemeye yarar.
Upload recipe
2-22
Fig. 2-3-21 Download firmware
Sifre korumasi:
: File>Password Protect ile bu fonksiyonu aktif veyapasif edebilirsiniz.(Sekil 2 -3 -22).
Eger aktif ise sekli belirecektir.Dop dosyasini acmadan önce sifre soracaktir.sifre Option > Model parameter 'den ayarlanabilir. (Sekil 2-3 -25). Eger sifreyi pasif ederseniz sekil 2-3 -24 'deki kutucuk belirir.
Download firmware
2-23
Sekil 2 -3 -22 Sifre korumasi
Sekil 2-3-23 Sekil 2 -3 -24
Password Protect
2-24
Sekil 2 -3-25 Sifre ayarlari
Yazdir:
: Ekrandaki sayfayi print etmek için
butonuna basabiliriz. Yada File > Print (Sekil 2 -3 -26), veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl+P 'yi
kullanabiliriz.
2-25
Sekil 2-3-26 Menu bardan Print etme
Fig. 2 -3 -27 Toolbardan print islemi
2-26
Baski onizleme:
: Print almadan önce önizleme yapabiliriz.
Sekil 2 -3 -28 Baski önizleme
Print Preview
2-27
Sekil 2 -3-29 önizleme
Son dosya kisayolu: Last file path:En son acilan 4 dosyayi burdan kisayol olarak acabiliriz.
Sekil 2 -3 -30.
2-28
Sekil 2 -3 -30 Son açilan dosyalar
Cikis:
: Screen editor programindan cikmamizi saglar File > Exit (sekil 2 -3 -31). Eger uygulmanizi saklamadiysaniz ekrana saklamanizgerek-tigini hatirlatan sekil 2-3-10 dialog kutucugu belirir.
Last open file path
2-29
Sekil 2 -3 -31 Cikis
2-3-2 EDIT
Sekil 2 -4 -1 Edition secenekleri
1. Geri
Exit
2-30
: Son yapilani geri almak icin kullanilir.
Butonuna basarak,v veya File > Undo secerek Sekil 2-4-2 , veya klavye kisayoluCtrl + Z. basarak gerceklestirilebilir.
Sekil 2-4-2 Menu bardan secimi
Undo
2-31
Sekil 2-4 -3 Toolbardan secimi
2. Ileri
: Geri alinan islemi eski haline almak icin kullanilir.
Sekil2-4 -5 , veya File > Redo secerek Sekil 2-4-4 , veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl+Y ile
gerceklenir.
Undo
2-32
Sekil 2-4-4 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-4 -5 Toolbardan secimi
Redo
Redo
2-33
3. Kes
: Secilen nesneyi silmeye yarar , yapistirma ve tasima
islemleri icin clipboardda saklar . butonu sekil 2-4-7, veya File > Cut
sekil 2-4 -6 , veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl + X ile kullanilabilir.
Sekil 2-4-6 Menubardan secimi
Cut
2-34
Sekil 2-4 -7 Toolbardan secimi
4. Kopyala
: Secilen nesneyi clipboarda kopyalar. Copy butonuna basa-
rak sekil 2-4-7, veya File > Copy secerek sekil 2-4-8, veya klavye kisayolu
Ctrl + C kullanilabilir.
Cut
2-36
5. Yapistir
: Clipboardaki nesneyi yapistirmaya yarar. butonu
Sekil 2-4 -11 , veya File > Paste sekil 2-4 -10, veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl + V ile
kullanilabilir.
Sekil 2-4-10 Menu bardan secimi
Paste
2-37
Sekil 2 -4 -11 Toolbardan secimi
6. Sil
:Secilen nesneyisilmek icin kullanilir sekil 2 -4 -12.
Paste
2-38
Sekil 2-4-12 Delete
7. Tumunu sec
: Butun nesneleri secmeye yarar ,sekil 2 - 4 -13. Butun hepsini sectigimizde, ust sol kosedeki nesne ana element olarak mavi ve beyaz cerceve ile cevrelenecektir.Digerleri ise siyah beyaz cerceve ile cevrelenir.
Delete
2-39
Sekil 2-4-13 Menu bardan secme
8.Bul
: Aradiginiz bir nesneyi ,resmi, adresi sayfayi bulmaniza ya-rar .Klavye kisayolu Ctrl+F veya Edit>find 'den ulasilabilir.Aranan nesne bulun- dugu zaman output windowda gorebilirsiniz.
Select All
2-40
Sekil 2-4-14 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-4-15 Dialog kutucugundan bulma
Find
2-41
Sekil 2-4 -16 Aranan element secimi
9. Yenile
: Okunan adresi,yazilan adresi.text 'i o sayfada veya butun sayfalarda degistirmeye yarar.Adres tipi bit,word,dword olabilir,sekil 2-4 -17.
Aranan element
isaretlenir.
Aranan element
2-42
Sekil 2-4-17 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2 -4 -18 Yenileme ornegi
1@D1000 'i bul
Replace
1@D2000 'le yenile
2-43
10. Grupla
: Edit > Group secerek yada butonuna tiklayarak se-
cilen butun nesneleri grup yapma imkani saglar .Nesneleri grup yaptiktan sonra ele-
mentler tek bir nesne gibi davranir grup olarak hareket eder.
Sekil 2-4-19 Menu bardan secimi
2-44
Sekil 2 -4-20 Grup yapma
Grup Boz:
: Nesnelerden olusan grubu bozmak icin Edit > Ungroup seceriz
butonuna basarakta nesneleri ungrup edebiliriz.
Selected symbol
2-45
Sekil 2-4-21 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2 -4 -22 Ungrup
Selected symbol
2-46
Kati Ayarla
: Nesnelerin diger nesnelere gore katlarini (altta,ustte)ayarla-mamizi saglar.Edit>Layer yada butonlariyla secilebilir.
Sekil 2-4-23 Menu bardan secimi
2-47
Fig. 2-4-24 Layer arrangement
Hizalamak
: Secilen elementleri hizalamaya yarar. Edit > Align ,sekil
2-4 -25 veya butonlariyla ,sekil 2 - 4 -26.Bu islevi gerceklestir-
mek icin 2 elementten daha fazlasina ihtiyaciniz vardir .
Bring to front
Send to back
Bring forward
Send backward
2-48
Sekil 2-4-25 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-4-26 Hizalama sonucu
2-49
Ayni olculerde yap
: Edit >Make Same Size yaparak yada sekil 2-4-28 deki butonu tiklayarak secili elementleri ayni olculerde yapabilirsiniz.
Sekil 2-4 -27 Ayni olculerde yapma
2-50
Fig. 2-4-28 Result of make same size
Yazi Yazma
: Text duzenlemek icin kullanilir.Bu islevi sectigimizde basi- na isareti gelir. Ayrica toolbardan da secilerek kullanilabilir.
Make the
same height
Make the
same size
Make the
same width The base
2-51
Sekil 2 -4 -29 Yazi yazma
Cogaltmak
: Bir elementi ayni anda birden fazla kopyalamamizi saglar. X ve Y ekseninde kacar adet yapmak istedigimizi yazarak ayisini belirlemis oluruz. Minimum kopya sayisi 2 olabilir. Eger yalnizca satira yada kolana kopyalamak istiyor-
sak ilgili yerlere check isareti koyariz.Element numaralari yataydan baslayarak dikeye dogru artar.Adresler bit yada word olabilir. bkz. sekil 2-4 -31 ve sekil 2 - 4 -32
Ozellik basliklari
Text toolbar
2-52
Sekil 2 -3 -30 Cogaltma
Sekil 2 - 4 -31 Cogaltma ornegi
2-53
Sekil 2 -4 -32 Coklu kopyalama ornegi
2-3-3 View
Sekil 2-5-1 View menusu secenekleri
Calisma esnasinda hangi toolbarlarin gozukup gozukmeyecegini ayarliyabildigimiz bo-
lumdur.Eger birisini secersek basina isareti gelecek ve sectiginiz toolbar pence-resi ekranin ust kosesinde yerini alacaktir.
Docking pencereler
2-54
Sekil 2-5 -2
1. Standard toolbar
simge Fonksiyon Tanim
New Yeni uygulama acar
Open Varolan uygulamayi acar
Save Uygulamayi saklar
Export Uygulamayi Bmp formatinda export eder
Undo Bir adim geri alir (bazilari geri alinamaz)
Redo Bir adim ileri alir
Cut Secili elementleri keser
Copy Secili elementleri kopyalar
Paste Secili elementleri yapistirir
Find Adres yada yazilari bulur.
New screen Yeni sayfa acar
Open screen Eski sayfayi acar
Print preview Baski onizlemesi
Print printeder
About screen editor
Screen editor versiyonu hakkinda bilgi verir
Tablo 2 -5 -1 Standart toolbar menusu
2-55
2. Durum arac cubugu Anlik bilgileri gosterir
Fig. 2-5-3 Durum arac cubugu
3. Text arac cubugu
Simge Fonksiyon Tanim
Text size Yazinin boyunu ayarlar
Font Fontu ayarlar
Align left Sola hizalar
Center to page horizontally
Yaziyi tam ortaya alir
Align right Saga hizalar
Align top Ustte hizalar
Center to page vertically
Yaziyi sayfanin dikey olarak tam ortasina alir
Align bottom
Asagi hizalar
Text color Yazi rengini ayarlar
Underline Yazinin altini cizer
Table 2 -5 -2 Text arac cubugu
4. Bitmap arac cubugu
Simge Fonksiyon Tanim
Enlarge a Figure Secilen sekli nesne kadar buyutur
Actual Figure size Secilen sekli gercek boyutuna getirir
Al ign to left side Secilen sekli sola hizalar
Center to page horizontally
Secilen sekli ortalar
Align to right side Secilen sekli sola hizalar
Align to top side Secilen sekli uste hizalar
Yukleme methoduMouse kordinatlari
Caps Lock
Scroll Lock Num Lock
Software
versiyonu
2-56
Simge Fonksiyon Tanim
Center to page vertically
Sekli sayfanin dikey olarak tam ortasina al
Align to bottom side Sekli sayfanin alt kosesine hizalar
Table 2-5-4 Bitmap arac cubugu5. Element arac cubuguToolbar
Simge Fonksiyon Tanim
Buton
Ibre
Bar
Pay
Gosterge
Deger
Display
Grafik
display
Giris
2-57
Toolbar
Simge Fonksiyon Tanim
Egri
Ornekleme
Alarm
Sekil
Table 2-5-5 Elementler
6. Planlama arac cubugu
A. Ust sira planlama arac cubugu
Simge Fonksiyon Tanim
Current text Secili nesnenin uzerindeki text
Current status O anki durumu
Previous windows Bir onceki pencereye doner
Next windows Bir sonraki pencereye gider
Compile Calismayi compile eder
Download screen data and recipe
Calismayi ve receteyi download eder
Download screen data
Ekrani download eder
On-line simulation Calismayi test etmek icin kullanilir PLC
baglantisina gerek vardir
Off-line simulation Calismayi test etmek icin kullanilir PLC
baglantisina gerek yoktur
Tablo 2-5-6
b. Alt sira planlama arac cubugu
2-58
Simge Fonksiyon Tanim
Group Secilen nesneleri gruplar
Ung roup Grubu bozar
Bring to front Secilen nesneyi uste alir
Send to back Secilen nesneyi alta alir
Bring forward Secilen nesneyi one alir
Send backward Secilen nesneyi arkaya alir
Align left Secilennesneleri sola hizalar
Align right Secilen nesneleri sola hizalar
Align top Secilen nesneleri yukari hizalar
Align bottom Secilen nesneleri asagi hizalar
Center to page vertically
Nesneyi sayfanin dikey ortasina yerlestirir
Center to page horizontally
Nesneyi sayfanin yatay ortasina yerlestirir
Make same width Secili nesneleri ayni genislikte yapar
Make same height Secili nesneleri ayni yukseklikte yapar
Make same size Secili nesneleri ayni olculerde yapar
Tablo 2-5-7 Alt seviye planlama arac cubugu
C. Zoom arac cubugu
Simge Fonksiyon Tanim
Zoom level
Zoom seviyesini ayarlar, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, 200% ve 300%
Zoom in Zoom seviyesini arttirir,150%, 200%
ve 300%.
Zoom out Zoom seviyesini azaltir, 25%, 50% ve
75%.
1:1 Elementleri gercek boyutunda gosterir
Tablo 2-5-8 Zoom arac cubugu 7. Property tablosu
Detayli bilgi icin bolum 3-1 'e bakiniz.
2-59
Sekil 2 -5-4 Element property tablosu
8. Output PenceresiYapilanlari kaydeder ve hatali adresleri gosterir.
Sekil 2 -5 -6 Output penceresi
Sekil 2 -5 -7 Output penceresi
2-60
Sekil 2-5-8 Output ornegi Sekil 2-5-9 Hata ornegi
9. Yakinlastir
: Nesnenin gorunusunu 150% , 200% ve 300% oranla-
rinda buyutur.Detaylar icin sekil 2-5 -10, sekil 2-5-11, sekil2-5-12 ve sekil 2-5 -13
Sekil 2-5-1 0 Menu bardan secimi
Zoom in
2-61
Sekil 2 -5 -11 Toolbardan secimi
Sekil 2-5-12 Zoom seviyesi = 100%
100%
Zoom in
2-62
Sekil 2-5-13 Zoom seviyesi= 150%
10. Uzaklastir
: Nesnenin gorunusunu 25%,50% and 75% oranlarinda
kucultur . Detaylar icin sekil 2 -5 -14, sekil 2-5 -1 5 ve sekil 2 -5 -1 6.
150%
2-63
Sekil 2-5-1 4 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-5-1 5 Zoom out 'dan once
Zoom out
2-64
Sekil 2 -5 -16 Zoom out 'dan sonra
11. Gercek boyut
: Gorunusu gercek olculerine alir. ve butunlariyla .
zoom out veya zoom in yapabiliriz yada sekil 2-5-17 'deki gibi secim yapabiliriz.
Sekil 2 -5 -1 7
12. Tam ekran
: Bkz. sekil 2-5-18 ve sekil 2-5-1 9.
75%
2-65
Sekil 2 -5 -1 8 Tamekran yapmadan once
Sekil 2-5-19 Tam ekran (Esc veya mousenin sol tusuyla burdan cikabilirsiniz)
2-66
I/O ekrani
: Bkz. sekil 2-5-2 0 ve sekil 2-5-2 1.
Sekil 2 -5 -20 I/O ekranindan once
2-67
Sekil 2 -5-21 I/O ekrani (Esc veya mousenin sol tusuyla burdan cikabilirsiniz)
Grid ayarlari
: Elementleri kolayca hizalama imkani verir. Grid araligi sekil 2-5-22 'deki menuden ayarlanir.
Sekil 2-5 -2 2 Grid ayarlari kutucugu
2-68
Sekil 2-5-23 Gridlerin gorunusu
2-3-4 Nesneler (Elements)
Sekil 2-6-1 Nesne secenekleri
Screen editor bir cok ozelligi bulunan 11 tip nesneye sahiptir.Bunlar;buton,ibre,bar, pay, gosterge, deger gosterme, grafik display,deger girme,egri ornekleme,alarm,grafik
vb. Kullanmak istediginiz elementi menu bardan alip kullanabilirsiniz,sekil 2-6-2 ve sekil 2-6 -3.
2-69
Sekil 2 -6 -2 secilen elementin olcusunu ayarlama
Sekil 2-6-3 Elementin gorunusu
Element olusturmanin farkli bir yontemi:Sayfanin uzerindeyken mausenin sag butonuna tiklayarak . Mousenin isaretcisini calisma
bolgesinin ustune getirir sag butona tiklariz acilan element tablosundan kullanmak is- tedigimiz elementi secip sol butona tiklariz,sectigimiz elementi sayfanin istedigimiz bol-
gesine koyar ve surukleyerek buyutlarini ayarliyabiliriz.Ozellikler sayfasindan (properties window) diger ozelliklerini ayarlayabiliriz,sekil 2 -6 -4, sekil 2-6-6 ve sekil 2 -6 -7.(Bkz.bolum 3)
2-70
Sekil 2-6-4 Acilan menuden elementin secimi
Sekil 2-6-5 Menu bardan elementin secimi
Click right button Click left button
to select
2-71
Sekil 2-6-6
Sol butona basin ve birak-
madan surukleyin
Boyutlar tamam ise
butonu birakin
2-72
Sekil 2-6-7 Element tasima
Mouse fonksiyonlari windows® ile aynidir. Mouse isaretcisi seklini aldigi za- man sol butona basili tutarak nesneyi surukleyip tasiyabiliriz ,sekil 2-6-8, sekil 2-6 -9
ve sekil 2-6-10.
Sekil 2-6-8 Isaretci seklini alacak
2-73
Fig. 2-6-9
Sol butona basin ve
birakmadan surukleyin
2-74
Sekil 2 -6 -10 Element genisligini ayarlama:
Secilen nesnenin uzatmak istedigimiz kosesine gidilip isaretcinin olmasi beklenir vesol tusa basili tutup surukleyerek genislik ayarlanir ,sekil 2-6-12 ve sekil 2-6-13 .
Tasimayi bitirmek i-
cin butonu birakin
2-75
Sekil 2 -6 -11
Sekil 2 -6 -12
isaretci
Sol tusa basin ve
surukleyin
2-76
Sekil 2-6-13 Nesnenin yeni olculeri
Elementin yuksekligini ayarlama: Secilen nesnenin uzatmak istedigimiz kosesine gidilip isaretcinin olmasi beklenir ve
sol tusa basip surukleyerek yukseklik ayarlanir ,sekil 2 -6 -14, sekil 2-6 -15 ve sekil 2 -6 -1 6.
2-77
Sekil 2 -6 -14
Isaretci
2-78
Sekil 2 -6 -15
Sol tusa basin ve
surukleyin
2-79
Sekil 2 -6 -16 Yukseklik ve genisligi birlikte ayarlama (Y ontem 1)
Isaretci seklini aldiginda sol tusa basili tutup surukleyerek nesnenin genislik ve yuksekligini birlikte ayarlayabilirsiniz, sekil 2-6-17, sekil 2-6-18 ve sekil 2-6-19.
Birak ve bitir
2-80
Sekil 2 -6 -17
isaretci
2-81
Sekil 2 -6 -18
Sol tusa basin ve birak-
madan surukleyin
2-82
Sekil 2 -6 -19 Yukseklik ve genisligi birlikte ayarlama (Yontem 2)
Isaretci seklini aldiginda sol tusa basili tutup surukleyerek nesnenin genislikve yuksekligini birlikte ayarlayabilirsiniz, sekil 2-6-20, sekil 2-6-21 ve sekil 2-6-22.
Birak ve bitir
2-83
Sekil 2 -6 -20
Sekil 2 -6 -21
isaretci
sol butona basin ve birak-
madan surukleyin
2-84
Fig. 2-6-22
Karakter girme:
Karakter girme islemi windows® ' da oldugu gibi isaretci seklini aldigi zaman
yapilabilir ,sekil 2-6-23 ve sekil 2-6-24
Birak ve bitir
2-85
Sekil 2 -6 -23
Sekil 2 -6 -24
Sol butona tikladigimizda
isaratci seklini alir
Karakter girisi
Blink
Ayni zamanda buraya-
da yazilir.
2-86
Mouse 'in sag butonu:Farkli bolgelerde mause'nin sag butonuna basildiginda farkli menulerin acildigini farke-
deceksiniz ,sekil 2 -6 -25, sekil 2 -6 -26 sekil 2 -6 -27.
Sekil 2 -6 -25
Toolbar display
2-87
Sekil 2 -6 -26
Sekil 2 -6 -27
Element secimi
Element basimi
2-88
2-3-5 Sayfa
Sekil 2 -7-1 Sayfa secenekleri Eger sayfayi kapama butonuna basarsaniz(sekil 2-7-2)sayfa silinmeden gizlenecektir.
Genel olarak programlardakapama butonuna bastigimizda cikmadan saklama uyarisi gelir . Fakat screen editorde sayfayi kapatmaz sadece gizler.
Sekil 2-7-2
1. Yeni sayfa acma:
Yeni sayfa acmak icin butonuna basabili riz yada Screen > New screen secebilir
(sekil 2-7-3), veya klavye kisayolu Shift+N kulluanabiliriz,daha sonra karsimiza sekil 2-7-5deki dialog kutucugu geecektir.
Sayfayi gizlemek icin
butonuna basilir
2-89
Sekil 2-7-3 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-7 -4 Toolbardan secimi
New screen
Yeni sayfa
2-90
Sekil 2-7-5 Yeni ekran acma dialog kutucugu
2. Ekran acma
eni sayfa acmak icin butonuna basabiliriz yada Screen > Open screen secebiliriz.
(sekil 2 -7 -6) veya klavye kisayolu Shift+N kulluanabiliriz,daha sonra karsimiza sekil 2-7-8 dialog
kutucugu gelecektir.
Sekil 2-7-6 Menu bardan secimi
Sayfa ismini girin
Open screen
2-91
Sekil 2-7 -7 Toolbardan secimi
Sekil 2 -7 -8 Sayfa acma dialog kutucugu
Open screen
2-92
3. Sayfa kesme Sayfanin tumunu kesmek icin kullanilir. Screen > cut screen secerek (sekil 2-7-9) veya klavye kisayolu Shift + T kullanarak sayfayi kesebiliriz. (Not:Sayfa kesme islemini ge- ri alamazsiniz bu islem sayfa silme islemiyle ayni islevi yapar fakat Paste komutu
ile geri yapistirilabilir.)
Sekil 2-7-9 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-7 -10 Sayfa kesme uyari mesaji
4. Sayfa kopyalamaScreen > copy (sekil 2-7-11)secerek yada Shift + C basarak bir sayfanin tumunu
kopyalayabiliriz.
Cut screen
2-93
Sekil 2 -7 -11
5. Sayfa yapistirma
Screen > paste secerek (sekil 2-7-12) , yada Shift + P yaparak sayfayi yapis-tirabiliriz. Yapistirilan sayfanin butun ozellikleri ayni olacaktir yalnizca sayfa ismi otoma-
tik olarak verilecektir.
Copy screen
2-94
Fig. 2-7-12
6. Sayfa silme
Screen > delete secerek (sekil 2 -7-13) yada Shift + D 'ye basarak sayfayi sile-biliriz. (Not: Sayfa silindikten sonra geri alinamaz bu yuzden silmeden once dik-
katli olmakta fayda vardir.)
Paste screen
2-95
Sekil 2 -7 -13
Sekil 2-7 -14 Sayfa silme uyarisi
7. Sayfa Acilis Macrosu
Sayfa acildiginda gerceklesen macrolardir (detayli bilgi icin bolum 4 'e bakiniz)
Delete screen
2-96
Sekil 2 -7 -15
Sekil 2-7-16 Ozellikler sayfasindan secimi
Screen Open Macro
Screen open Macro
2-97
Sekil 2 -7 -17 Makro yazimi
8. Sayfa Kapanis Macrosu Sayfa kapandiginda gerceklesen macrolardir (detayli bilgi icin bolum 4 'e bakiniz)
2-98
Sekil 2-7-18 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-7-19 Ayarlar sayfasindan secimi
Screen Close Macro
Screen Close Macro
2-99
Sekil 2 -7 -20 Makrolar
9. Sayfa dongu macrosu
Sayfa acik oldugu surece peryodik olarak gerceklesen macrolardir.(Macronun ger- ceklesme peryodlarini dongu zaman ayarlari menusunden ayarlayabiliriz.(Bkz.bolum 4)
2-100
Sekil 2-7-21 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-7-22 Ozellikler sayfasindan secimi
Screen Cycle Macro
Screen Cycle Macro
2-101
Sekil 2 -7 -23 Macro basimi
10. Yardimci butonlarYardimci anahtarlar her sayfada ayri ayri kullanilabilir, sekil 2 -7 -24, sekil 2-7-25 sekil 2-7 -26.
2-102
Sekil 2-7-24 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-7-25 Yardimci butonlar
Yardimci butonlar
Auxiliary key
2-103
Sekil 2-7-26 Yardimci butonlarin secimiModellere gore kullanilabillecek yardimci buton sayilari:
DOP Model ismi Yardimci buton sayisi
DOP-A57GSTD 4
DOP-A57CSTD 4
DOP-A75CSTD 5
DOP-A10TCTD 6
11. Ekran ayarlari Bu ayarlarda , mevcut ekranin alt sayfa olup olmayacagi ayalanir. Ayrica alt sayfanin
olculerinin ve saat macrosunun zamanlarinin ayarlandigi yerdir,sekil 2-7 -29.
2-104
Sekil 2-7-27 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-7-28 Ayarlar penceresinden secimi
Screen properties
2-105
Sekil 2 -7-29 Ekran ayarlari penceresi
2-3-6 Araclar (Tools)
Sekil 2-8 -1 Araclar secenekleri
1. Derleyici (Compile) Yapilan uygulamayi HMI formatinda delemeye yarar. Eger uygulama yeni ise compile
etmeden once saklamaniz gerektigini hatirlatir. Eger mevcut uygulama saklanmis veya eski bir uygulama ise direk olarak derler.Derleme yaparken output penceresinde nes-
neler ve varsa hatalara ait mesajlar gozukur.Eger bir hata varsa derleme islemi tamam-
lanmaz.Tools > compile secerek veya butonuna basarak yada klavyede
Ctrl + F7 tuslarina basarak calismamizi compile edebiliriz, sekil 2-8-4 ve sekil 2-8-5
Alt ekran ayarlari
Macro icin
gecikme zamani
Secilerek ilisikteki ayarlar yapilabilir
2-106
Sekil 2-8-2 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-8 -3 Toolbardan secimi
Compile
Compile
2-107
Sekil 2-8-4 Compile ornegi
Sekil 2-8-5
Kac hata oldugunu
gosterir
Butun derleme sonuclari bu-
rada gozukur. Eger bir hata varsa
sebebi yazar ve hata mesajinin us-
tune tiklarsak hatali nesne belirir.
Compile basarili
2-108
2. Uygulamayi ve receteyi download etme (Download screen&Recipe) Ekrani ve receteyi download etmek icin Tools > Download secilir sekil 2-8-7 veya
butonuna basilmalidir sekil 2-8-8 klavyede Ctrl+F8 tuslarina basilaraklta bu
islem gerceklestirilebilir.Eger bilgisayar HMI 'a baglanamiyorsa hata mesaji verir, sekil 2-8-10 ve sekil 2-8-11.
Sekil 2-8-7 Menu bardan secimi
Download Screen & Recipe
2-109
Sekil 2-8 -8 Toolbardan secimi
Sekil 2-8-9 Download ediyor
Download Screen
& Recipe
2-110
Sekil 2-8-10 USB baglanti hatasi Sekil 2-8-11 Data formati Hatali
3. Uygulamayi download etme (Download Screen) Yalnizca uygulamayi download etmek icin kullanilir.Tools >Download screen secerek (se-
kil 2-8-12) veya butonuna basarak (sekil 2-8-13) yada klavyede Ctrl+F9
tuslarina basarak yapilabilir.
Sekil 2-8-1 2 Menu bardan secimi
Download Screen
2-111
Sekil 2 -8 -1 3 Toolbardan secimi
4. Online simulasyon (Online simulation)Yapilan calismayi online olarak simule etmek icin kullanilir ama bu arada DOP bir
PLC 'ye bagli olmalidir. Aksi takdirde online simulasyon yapilamaz.Fakat offline simu-lasyon yapmak icin PLC baglantisina gerek yoktur.Tools > Online simulation secerek
(sekil 2-8-14) yada butonuna basarak (sekil 2-8-15) yada Ctrl + F4 tuslarina basarak
basarak online simulasyon yapilabilir.(sekil 2-8-16)
Download screen
2-112
Sekil 2-8-1 4 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2 -8 -1 5 Toolbardan secimi
Online simulation
Online simulation
2-113
Sekil 2-8-16 Online simulasyon display
5. Offline simulasyon (Offline simulation) Offline simulasyon calismanin dogrulugunu,okunan ve yazilan adreslerin ve macro-
larin testi icin kullanilabilir, PLC baglantisi gerekmez.Tools > Offline simulation secerek
(sekil 2-8-17), butonuna basarak(sekil 2-8-18) yada klavye kisayolu Ctrl + F5 'e basarak gerceklestirilebilir.Offline simulasyon goruntusu sekil 2-8 -1 6 'daki gibi olacaktir.
Sekil 2-8-1 7 Menu bardan secimi
Offline Simulation
2-114
Sekil 2 -8 -1 8 Toolbardan secimi
6. Recete (Recipe)
Recete kontrolore istenen degerleri pratik bir sekilde girme imkani kilar. HMI 'in hafizasini kullanarak daha onceden kaydedilmis datalari PLC 'ye transfer edebilirsiniz.Recete
uygulamadan ayri olarak recete hazirlik bolumunde duzenlenir ve ayri olarak download edilebilir.Ayrica bir recete her tur PLC icin kullanilabilir.Receteyi kullanabil-
mek icin once aktif etmek gerekir,sekil 2 -8 -20.
Offline simulation
2-115
Sekil 2-8-1 9 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-8-20 Recete hazirlama kutucugu
Recipe
2-116
Sekil 2-8 -20 'de 10 grup var ve her grup 10 word 'den olusuyor.Bu 10 gruptan herhangi istedigimiz bir tanesini HMI hafizasindan PLC 'ye transfer edebiliriz.
7. Receteyi download etme (Download Recipe)
Receteyi HMI 'a yukler. Tools > Download recipe secilerek yapilabilir.Ayrica hazirladigi-miz bir receteyi PC 'mizde .rcp uzantili bir dosya olarak saklayabiliriz.
Sekil 2-8-2 1 Recete acma
8. Recete hazirlama(Recipe edition) Recete fonksiyonunu kullanmak icin aktif etmek gerekir.( )Eger bu fonksiyonu aktif etmezsek receteyi download etsek bile kullanamayiz.
Adres: Recetenin basliyacagi adresi girdigimiz bolgedir. ,
(Sekil 2-8-22 ) (Not: Buraya girdigimiz adres PLC 'nin data bolgesi olmalidir)
2-117
Sekil 2 -8-22 Recetenin baslangic adresi
Uzunluk (Lenght):Recetenin herbir grubunun kac word 'den olusacaginin belirlendigi bolumdur.
Sifirdan buyuk bir sayi yazilmalidir aksi takdirde sekil 2-8-23 'deki uyari gelir.
Sekil 2 -8 -23
Grup (Group): Recetenin kac gruptan olacagini belirler. Grup sayisi sifirdan buyuk girilmelidir
aksi takdirde sekil 2-5-24 'deki uyari mesaj kutucugu gelecektir.
2-118
Sekil 2 -8 -24
Uygula (Apply):Grup numarasi ve uzunlugunu girdikten sonra Apply butonu tiklanarak recete acilabilir.HMI 'in recete hafizasi 64K 'dir (uzunluk X grup=64 X 1024 'den
kucuk olmalidir.) Eger bunlardan birisi 0 veya limitin ustunde olursa sekil 2-8-25 'deki uyari mesaj kutucugu gelecektir.
Sekil 2 -8 -25
Ac (Open): “Open” butonuna basilir,acilmak istenilen recete ismine tiklanir.Acilan recete dosyasi diger marka PLC'lerde de kullanilabilecegi icin start adres kismi bostur.
Sekil 2 -8 -26
Saklama (Save): Recete dosyasini PC 'ye saklarken ayni recete degisik marka PLC lerde kullanilabilecegi icin start adres otomatik olarak saklanmaz.
2-119
Sekil 2 -8 -27
Reset: Hazirlanan receteyi siler.Sekil 2 -8 -28 ve Sekil 2 -8 -29
Sekil 2-8-28 Recete ekrani
2-120
Sekil 2 -8 -29 Resetten sonraTemizle (Clear):Clar butonuna bastigimizda girmis oldugumuz butun degerler
0 olur,sekil 2-8-30 ve sekil 2-8-31.
Sekil 2-8-30 Recete ekrani
2-121
Sekil 2 -8 -31 Clear yaptiktan sonra
Print: Recete degerlerinin ciktisini alir.
OK: Yazilan receteyi onaylamak icin kullanilir. (Onaylayabilmek icin adres girilmis olmalidir,sekil 2-8 -32)
Sekil. 2 -8-32 Adres girilmemisse gelen hata mesaji
2-122
Iptal (Cancel): Cancel butonunu kullanarak receteyi iptal edebiliriz.(Yazilan bilgileri saklama-)dan cikar.)
2-3-7 Secenekler (Options)
Sekil 2 -9 -1 Secenekler menusu
1. Model parametreleri (Model Parameter) Options > Model parameter secilerek HMI 'in genel haberlesme ayarlarinin yapildigi
model parametreleri ayar menusunu acilabilir.Genel ayarlar kisminda genel olarak uy-gulamanin ismi,HMI tipi, PLC tipi, baslangic sayfasi secimi,sistem kontrol ve durum bol-
gesi, download portu, sifre vb. ayarlari yapilabilir.Haberlesme ayarlari kisminda PLC ID numarasi ve protokol ayarlari yapilabilir.Detaylar icin sekilleri inceleyiniz.
Fig. 2-9-2
Model Parameter
2-123
Genel ayarlar (General setting)
Sekil 2-9-3
Uygulamanin ismi: Ayni zamanda dosyanin ismidir.
HMI type: HMI tipinin secildigi yerdir.DOP serisi farkli HMI 'lar icin farkli fonksiyonlar icerir.
Sekil 2-9-4 HMI tipi
Kontrolor(Controller): PLC tipi secmek icin kullanilir.
Sekil 2-9-5 PLC ayarlari
En yuksek seviye sifresi: En yuksek oncelikli passwordu koymak icin kullanilir.Yazilim 8 seviye sifresine sahiptir.(Option>Model parameter>security)
2-124
Varsayilan baslangic seviyesi: Baslangic seviyesini ayarlamak icin kullanilir, en yuksek
seviye 7 en dusuk seviye 0 dir.
Sistem kontrol bolgesi (System control area)– start adres : Sistem kontrol bolgesi adresini belirler.(PLC'den sayfa gecisi icin de kullanilir.)
Sistem kontrol bolgesi-Uzunluk (System control area– length):Kullanilan foksiyonlara
gore uzunluk farkli olacaktir.(Mesela recete kullanirken uzunluk 8 Word 'den kisa olur ). Ilgili HMI parametreleri icin bolum 4 'e bakiniz.
Sistem durum bolgesi (System status area) – start adres: Sistem durum bolgesinin ad-
resini girmek icin kullanilir ,bu bolgeye PLC adresi girilmelidir. Sistem durum bolgesi data blogu 6 ardisik word 'den olusur. Ilgili parametreler icin bolum 4 'e bakiniz.
Yukleme ayarlari (Download setting )– USB1.1: Yukleme yapmak icin USB1.1 'i kullanir.
Yukleme ayarlari (Download setting )– PC haberlesme portu: Yukleme yapmak PC portlarini kullanir.
Sekil 2 -9 -6 PC haberlesme portla
Baslangic gecikme zamani (Delay time for start-up): Baslangicta PLC'nin calismasini beklemesi icin HMI 'a gecikme zamani girilir.(Ayar araligi 0-255 saniyedir.)
Saat Makrosu Gecikme zamani (Delay time for clock macro): Saat makronun gercek-
lesmesi icin gecikme zamani olusturur.(Ayar araligi 100~999 ms. dir.) Haberlesme Parametreleri Ayarlari (Communication parameter setting)
2-125
Sekil 2-9-7
Baglanti ayarlari (Connection setting): Baglanti ayarlari ve port secilir. (DOP serileriayni anda farkli iki PLC 'ye baglanabilir.)
Sekil 2-9-8
Haberlesme portu (Communication port): PLC baglanti portu (COM 1 veya COM 2) secilir.
2-126
Sekil 2-9-9
PLC ayarlari (PLC setting)-Password: PLC sifresi koymak icin kullanilir.
Haberlesme gecikme zamani(delay time for communicating):Haberlesme gecikme
suresi ayarlanir.( 0 - 255 ms.)
Okuma optimizasyonu(Optimize): Optimizasyonu aktif eder.Bkz. sekil 2-9-7
PLC ID: PLC 'nin ID numarasinin yazildigi bolumdur.Varsayilan deger 1'dir.Ayar ara-ligi 0- 255 'dir.
Haberlesme arayuzu (Communication interface): RS232 , RS422 ve RS485 secilebilir.Varsayilan deger RS232 'dir.
Sekil 2 -9 -10
Data bit: Data biti secimi yapilir.
Sekil 2 -9 -11 Stop bit: Stop biti secimi yapilir.
Sekil 2 -9 -12 Communication baud rate:Baud rate secimi yapilir.
Sekil 2 -9 -13
Parity bit: Parity biti secilir.
Sekil 2 -9 -1 4
2.Alarm ayarlari(Alarm setup) Options > Alarm setup secilerek alarm ayarlari menusune girilebilir (sekil 2-9-15). Bu
ayarlar element ayarlariyla birlikte yapilmalidir.Eger belirtilen sart secilmis adrestegerceklesirse, HMI otomatik olarak yazilan mesaji gosterecektir.Alarm ayar menu-
2-127
sunde, append, delete, modify, OK, cancel ve close secenekleri vardir(sekil 2-9 -1 6). Alarm ayarlarini “append”i secerek yapabiliriz. (Sekil 2 -9-17).
Sekil 2-9-15 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-9 -16 Alarm ayarlariEkle (Append): Alarm ekler.
Alarm setup
2-128
Sekil 2 -9-17 Alarm ozellikleri
Mesaj: Alarm geldiginde goruntulenecek mesaj. Display rengi: Alarm mesajinin rengi.
Trigger Mode: Alarmin ne zaman goruntulenecegi;ilgili bitin On-Off durumu secilir. Alarm screen: Alarmin hangi ekranda goruntulenecegi secilir.
Delete: Secilen alarmi siler. Modify: Secilen alarmi degistirir.
Scan time (sec.): Tarama zamani ayarlanir. Kayit sayisi (Number of records in history buffer): Alt alta kac alarm yazilacagi secilir,
Eger yazilan sayidan fazla alarm gelirse ilk gelen alarm silinir son gelen alarm en alta kaydolur.Ornek olarak History buffer sayisi 100 yazilsin.101 'inci alarm geldiginde 1.alarm sili-
nir, ikinci alarm 1. olur,ucuncu alarm 2.olur...yuzuncu kayit 99.olur ve yeni kayit 100'uncuolarak kaydedilir.
Retentive: Enerji kesintisinde kayitlari SRAM 'e kaydetmek icin kullanilir.(SRAM sistem
pilinden beslenir) Non -volatile: Kayitlari enerji kesilsede kesilmesede SRAM 'e kaydeder.
3. History setup: Detaylar icin bkz. bolum 3.
2-129
Sekil 2 -9 -18
Ekle (Append): Bir grafik datasi ekler.
Sekil. 2 -9 -19 Grafik ayarlari
History setup
2-130
Sekil 2-9-20 Tetikleyici - Timer
Sekil 2 -9-21 Tetikleyici- PLC
Okunacak adres (Read address): Okunacak adres girilir. Uzunluk (Size): Ardisik kac adres okunacagi girilir.
Sekil 2 -9 -22 Uzunluk
Ornekleme peryodu (Sample cycle): Okuma isleminin ornekleme peryodunu belirler.Eger tetikleyici PLC secilirse bu ayar gecersiz olur.Ayar araligi 0 - 10000 'dir.
Ornek sayisi (Sample point):
Eger yazilan sayidan fazla alarm gelirse ilk gelen alarm silinir son gelen alarm en alta kaydolur.Ornek olarak History buffer sayisi 100 yazilsin.101 'inci alarm geldiginde 1.alarm sili-
2-131
nir, ikinci alarm 1. olur,ucuncu alarm 2.olur...yuzuncu kayit 99.olur ve yeni kayit 100'uncuthird record will become to the forth record…and the 100th record will become to 99th
olarak kaydolur.
Tarih ve zaman kayit (Record date and time): Aktif yada pasif eder.
Auto stop: Kayit sayisi doldugunda dursun yada durmasin secimi yapilir.
Non -vola tile: Enerji kesintisinde kayitlari saklasin yada saklamasin secimi yapilir.
Tetikleme kaynagi (Trigger source): Timer veya PLC secimi yapilabilir.
OK: Sakla ve cik.
Cancel: Saklamadan cikar.
Delete: Bir grafik datasini siler.
Modify: Grafik datasini yeniler.
4. Etiket tablosu (Tag table)
Cok kullanilan yada gerekli olan adreslere etiket vermeye yarar. Ornek olarak,M1 bitine "start"etiketini verelim.Calismamiza bir buton koyalim buton ayarlari write adress bolgesinde
tag kisminda start etiketini secersek write adres otomatik olarak M1 olur.
2-132
Sekil 2-9-2 3 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2 -9 -24 Etiket tablosu ayarlari
PLC Memory
Internal Memory
Tag Table
2-133
6. Resim bankasi (Picture Bank) Calismaya programin kendi kutuphanesinde olmayan rasimler eklemek icin kullanilr.
Resim formatlari BMP ve JPG olabilir.
Sekil 2 -9 -2 5 Menu bardan secimi
Picture Bank
2-134
Sekil 2 -9 -26 Resim bankasi
Resim eni X boyu X rengi
2-135
Eklenecek resim
Bir resim bankasi secin
veya yeni olusturun.
Select picture
2-136
Fig. 2-9-27
Yeni resim bankasi ac
Resim bankasi sil
Resim bankasini sakla
Resim ekle
Resim cikar
Resmi sil
Renkleri ters cevir
Resmi256gritonacevirir
Yatay olarak aynalar
Dikey olarak aynalar
Gercek boyutlarina getirir
Uzat-eg
7. Yazi bankasi (Text bank)
Yaygin olarak kullanilan yada gerekli olan yazilari saklamak icin kullanilir.
2-137
Sekil 2-9-28 Menu bardan secimi
Text bank
2-138
Sekil 2-9 -29 Text bankasi
2-139
Import text
Nesne secilip sag tusa basilir
Text secildikten sonra
OK 'e basilir
2-140
Sekil 2 -9 -30 Yazi ornegi
8.Alt-makro (Sub -macro)
Alt makrolarin yazildigi bolumdur,bu makrolar diger makrolar tarafindan da cagrilabilir. Detaylar icin bkz.bolum 4
2-141
Sekil 2-9-31 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-9-32 Alt-makro
9. Baslangic Makrosu (Initial macro) HMI enerjilendiginde gerceklesecek olan baslangic makrolarinin yazildigi bolgedir. Detaylar
icin bkz. bolum 4.
Submacro
2-142
Sekil 2-9-33 Menu bardan secimi
10. Arkaplan Makrosu (Background Macro) Arkaplan makrolarinin girildigi bolumdur. Detaylar icin bkz. bolum 4.
Initial Macro
2-143
Sekil 2-9-3 4 Menu bardan secimi
11. Zaman Makrosu (Clock Macro) HMI enerjili oldugu surece Refer to
chapter 4 for detail.
Background Macro
2-144
Sekil 2-9-35 Menu bardan secimi
12. Cevresel Ayarlar (Environment setting) Screen editorun gorunusunu ayarlar.
Clock Macro
2-145
Sekil 2-9-36 Menu bardan secimi
Environment
2-146
Sekil 2-9 -37 Cevresel ayarlarSistem Kaynagi (system path): Yurutum ve .DLL dosyalarinin saklandigi bolgedir.
Gerekmedikce degistirilmemesi tavsiye edilir.
Cikis kaynagi (Output path): Compile isleminden sonra olusacak dosyalarin saklan-digi yerdir. Online simulasyon, offline simulasyon, upload ,download islemlerindenolusan yurutum dosyalari bu bolgede saklanir.
Gerekmedikce degistirilmemesi tavsiye edilir.
Secenekler (Options):
Arac cubuklari/Pencereler (Toolbars/windows): Kullanilacak arac cubuklarini secmek icin kullanilir.
Dil (Language): Dil secimi yapilir,3 dil secenegi vardir. Geleneksel Cince,basitlestirilmis Cince,ve Ingilizce.
Yukleme-cekme ayarlari (Upload/download setting):USB veya port secimi yapilabilir.
2-147
Otomatik sakla (Auto save): Dosyayi peryodik olarak otomatik saklar. Zaman birimi dakikadir.
Otomatik ac (Auto open):Program acildiginda son calismayi otomatik olarak acar.
2-3-8 Pencereler (Windows)
Sekil 2 -10-1 Pencere secenekleri1. Pencereyi kapat (Close window)
O anki pencereyi gizlemeye yarar ,pencereden cikmaz. Gizlenmis pencereyi acmakicin Screen > Open screen secilmelidir.
Sekil 2-10 -2 Menu bardan secimi
Close window
2-148
Sekil 2 -10-3 Pencere kapama ornegi – 1.adim
Sekil 2 -10-4 Pencere kapama ornegi – 2.adim
Kapattiktan sonra
1 pencere kaldi.
Kapatmadan once iki
pencere var.
2-149
2. Butun pencereleri kapat (Close all windows) Butun sayfalari gizlemek icin kullanilir,kapatmaz.Gizlenmis pencereyi acmak
icin Screen > Open screen secilmelidir.
Sekil 2-10 -5 Menu bardan secimi
Close all windows
2-150
Sekil 2-10 -6 Pencereleri kapatmadan once
Sekil 2 -10-7 Pencereleri kapattiktan sonra
2-151
3. Sonraki pencere (Next window) Bir sonraki pencereye gecmek icin kullanilir.Eger son penceredeysek bu islem gercek-
lesmez.
Sekil 2-10 -8 Menu bardan secimi
Next window
2-152
Sekil 2 -10-9 Toolbar secimi
Sekil 2 -10-10
Next window
Sonraki pencereye
gecmeden once
2-153
Sekil 2 -10-11
4. Onceki pencere (Previous window) Bir onceki pencereye gecmek icin kullanilir.Eger ilk penceredeysek bu islem gercek-
lesmez.
“Next" butonuna bas-
tiktan sonra.
2-154
Sekil 2 -10-12 Menu bardan secimi
Sekil 2-10 -13 Toolbardan secimi
Previous window
Previous window
2-155
Sekil 2 -10-14
Sekil 2 -10-15
Bir onceki sayfaya
gecmeden once.
Bir onceki sayfaya
gectikten sonra.
2-156
5. Kaskat (Cascade) Butun pencereleri kaskat bicimde acar,sekil 2-10-17 ve sekil 2-10-18.
Sekil 2 -10-16 Menu bardan secimi
Cascade
2-157
Sekil 2 -10-17 Kaskat gorunumden once
Sekil 2-10-18 Kaskat gorunum
Cascade
2-158
6. Yatay sirala (Title Horizontal) Pencereleri alt alta acar ,sekil 2 -10-20 ve sekil 2-10 -21.
Sekil 2 -10-19 Menu bardan secimi
Title Horizontal
2-159
Sekil 2-10 -20 Yatay siralamadan once
Sekil 2 -10-21 Yatay siralamdan sonra
2-160
7. Dikey sirala (Title Vertical) Sayfalari dikey olarak acar,sekil 2-10 -24.
Sekil 2 -10-22 Menu bar dan secimi
Title Vertical
2-161
Sekil 2 -10-23 Dikey siralamadan once
Sekil 2-10 -2 4 Dikey siralamadan once
2-162
8. Pencere ozetleri (Windows summary) Acilmis butun pencereler Window menusunun altinda goruntulenir. Gormek istedigimizi
tiklayarak o pencereyi goruntuleriz.
Sekil 2 -10-25 Menu bardan secimi
2-163
Sekil 2-10 -2 6 Screen_2 'i secmeden once
Sekil 2-10 -2 7 Screen_2 sectikten sonra
2-164
2-3-9 Yardim (Help)
Sekil 2-11-1 Yardim secenekleri
1. Icindekiler (Contents) Delta HMI yardim basliklarini goruntuler.
Sekil 2-11 -2 Yardim
2. Screen Editor hakkinda (About Screen Editor)
Screen Editor programinin versiyonu goruntulenir.
Sekil 2 -11-3
3-1
Bolum 3 Nesne Fonksiyonlari
Bu bolumde ekran duzenleyici programinda kullanilacak nesnelerin ozellikllerive kullanilmadan once yapilmasi gereken ayarlar anlatilacaktir.
3-1 Nesne Secimi (How to Choose Element)
Nesne secmenin 3 farkli yontemi vardir:
1. Calisma bolgesinde sag butona tiklanarak gelen menuden secilebilir,fig. 3-1 -1. 2. Menu bardan secilebilir,fig. 3-1-2.
3. Toolbardan secilebilir,fig. 3-1-3.
Fig. 3-1-1
Sag tusa basildiginda a-
aci acilan menu
3-2
Fig. 3-1-2
Fig. 3-1 -3 Toolbardan secimi
3-3
Kullanilacak nesne secildikten sonra calisma bolgesinde sol tusa basili tutularak mause suruklenir ve nesne yerlestirilir,fig 3-1-4.
Fig. 3-1-4
3-2 Buton (Button Element)
Fig. 3 -2 -1 Buton secenekleri
3-4
Buton tipi Macro Read Write Fonksiyonu
Set Button ON Yes Yes
Bu butona bastigimizda ayarlanan adresin durumuON olur,tekrar basmamiz adresin konumunu degis-tirmez.OFF etmedigimiz surece ON olarak kalir. Eger butona bastigimiz an bir ON Macro varsa ayni anda gerceklesecektir.
Reset Button OFF Yes Yes
Bu butona bastigimizda ayarlanan adresin durumuOFF olur, tekrar basmamiz adresin konumunu degis-tirmez.ON etmedigimiz surece OFF olarak kalir. Eger bir OFF Macro varsa ayni anda gerceklesecektir.
Maintained ON OFF Yes Yes
Bu butona bastigimizda ayarlanan adresin durumubastigimiz surece ON olur,biraktigimiz zaman OFF olurEger bir ON/OFF macro varsa ayni zamanlarda ger-ceklesir.
Momentary ON OFF Yes Yes
Bu butona bastigimizda ayarlanan adresin durumuON olur ve ON macro gerceklesir.Butona tekrarbastigimizda ayni adres OFF olur,OFF macro ger-ceklesir.
Multistate No Yes Yes
Bu buton icin 1-256 arasinda farkli konum ayarlanabilir.Butona her bastigimizda ayarlarimiza gore ya bir son-raki gorevi yada bir onceki gorevi yapar.Ornek olarak butonun konumu 2 iken basarsak ayarlarimiza gore ya 3.konuma yada bir onceki 1.konuma gecer.
Set value No No Yes
Butona basildiginda deger girebilmek icin ekrana bir tustakimi gelir.Tus takimini kullanarak yazdigimiz sayi Enter tusuna bastigimizda Write adres kisminda belir-tilen bolgeye yazilmis olur.
Set constant No No Yes adrese daha onceden belirlenmis sabit sayi kaydolur.
Increment No Yes Yes After pressing button, HMI will add the setting constant to write address of element.
Decrement No Yes Yes mis adresteki bilgiye ayarlanmis sabit sayi eklenir.Goto
Screen No No No Bu butona basildiginda ekrana belirtilen sayfa gelir.
Previous Main
Screen No No No
Bu butona basildiginda ekrana bir onceki sayfa gelir.
Table 3-2-1 3-2-1 Genel Butonlar (General Buttons)
Bu butonlardan herhangi birisine bastigimizda HMI PLC 'ye ON/OFF sinyallerini yollayacaktir.Bu butonlarin 4 tipi vardir: Set buton, Reset buton, Maintained ve Momentary.
Bu butona basildiginda Write adres kismina yazilmis
Bu butona her basildiginda Write adres kismina yazil-
3-5
Fig. 3-2-2 Buton ayarlari
Buton ayarlari:
1. , Butonun yazacagi ve okuyacagi adres.
Input adres
2. , Kullanicinin butonun stilini ve onalan rengini secebilecegi bolumdur.
Durum: ? sonraki veya ?
onceki durum 0. durumda bu yuzden
0. duruma ait sekil ve
Butonun ismi
Buton seklinin ayarlanabi-
lecegi bolum.
Buton icin 4 farkli stilin
secilebilecegi bolum.
Ayarlar sayfasi icin
butonun ustune tiklayin
Buton tipinin secilebilecegi
bolum.
yazilar gorunur.
3-6
(Gorunmez buton)
Buton stilleri
3. ,ON/OFF Macrolarin yazilabileci kisimdir,detaylar icin bknz. bolum4
4. ,
,Yazinin fontunun,renginin,buyuklugunun ayarlandigi kisimdir.
5. ,Buton seklinin secilebildigi bolumdur.
6. Buton tipinin degistirilebildigi bolumdur.
Buton tipleri
A. Set: Bastiktan sonra hep ON olan buton. B. Reset: Bastiktan sonra hep OFF olan buton.
C. Maintained: Basinca ON birakinca OFF olan buton.D. Momentary:Basilinca ON,tekrar basilinca OFF olan buton.
7. Butona islevini gerceklestirmesi icin basili tutmamiz gereken surenin ayarlandigi bolum.
8.
Ornek: Kullanici seviyesini belirler.
Durum 0: OFF durumu Durum 1 : ON durumu
3-7
ON/OFF buton ornekleri3-2-2 Cok durumlu buton (Multistate)
Her konumdaki sekil ,gorev farkli olabilir.Bir WORD icin 256 ,bir LSB icin 16 ,ve bir Bit icin 2 farkli konum vardir. Secilen birime gore Read/Write adresi degisecektir.
Eger, WORD yada LSB secilirse read/write adres Word olacaktir.Eger,Bit secilirse read/write adres Bit olacaktir.Butona her basisimizda ya bir onceki yada bir sonraki
konumuna gecer.
Fig. 3-2 -3 Multistate ayarlari
Multistate ayarlari:
1. , Multistate butonun okuyacagi ve yazacagi adres.
Konum sayisi:word: 256;
LSB:16; BIT:2
Konum: ? onceki veya ?
sonraki konum0.konumda ve bu
konuma ait texti
gosterir. Butonun ustundeki yazi
Buton sekli
Secilebilecek 4 farkli buton
stili var.
Property sayfasi icin
butona tiklanir.
3-8
Adres girisi
2. , ,,
Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.
3. , Butona sekil secilen bolumdur.
4. , : user can Nesnenin stilinin ve onplan renginin ayarlanabildigi bolumdur.
(gorunmez buton)
Nesne stili
5. Nesnenin aktif olmasi icin minimum basili tutulmasi gereken sure.
6. Kullanici seviyesinin ayarlandigi bolumdur.
7. : Multistate buton icin konum sayisidir. WORD icin 1-256 , LSB icin 1-16 ve Bit icin 2 konum secilebilir.
8. Butona bastigimizda bir onceki konumami,bir sonraki konumami gececegini belirler.
Ornek: Birim LSB secilmis ise (D100.0—D100.1----D100.3 -D100.4)
3-9
K0=D100.0 ON K1=D100.1 ON K2=D100.2 ON K3=D100.3 ON K4 =D100.4 ON
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 MULTI-DEGER
Multistate uygulamasi3-2-3 Deger Girme (Set value)
Bu tur butona basildiginda ekrana tus takimi gelecektir.Deger girilip Enter'a
basildiginda girilen deger PLC 'nin ilgili datasina kaydolur. Maxsimum ve minimum araliginda deger girilebilir ayrica yazdiktan sonra veya once bit set etme
ozelligide ayarlanabilir (Trigger mode).
Fig. 3 -2-4 Deger girme buton ayarlari
Konum numarasi
ve yazisini gosterir.
.
Butonun ustundeki yazi
Butonun stili
Deger girdikten sonra
veya once set bit islemi
3-10
Fig. 3-2 -5 Deger girme buton ayarlari
Deger girme buton ayarlari:
1. ,
Deger yazilacak adres.
2. ,
, Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.
3. ,Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
Sol taraftaki ayar kutucu-
gu icin buraya basilir.
Deger birimi
Data formati
Deger araligi
(maximum/minimum)
Virgulden once-sonra
3-11
4. ,Buton stilinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
(Gorunmez buton)
Buton stili
5. , Bir biti deger girme isleminden once yada sonra set etmek icin kullanilir. Not: Bu fonk-siyon ilgili biti sadece ON eder. Eger tekrar ayni bit set edilmek isteniyorsa baska bir
yontemle onceden OFF edilmelidir.
6. Kullanici seviyesini ayarlar.
7. , Data uzunlugunu ve formatini belirler.
8. , Girilebilecek deger araligini belirler.
9. , :Virgulden once-sonra girilebilecek rakam sayisi-
nin ayarladigi kisimdir.Set value butonuna basildiktan sonra ekrana PLC 'nin ilgili adresine (Burada D1000) deger
girebilmek icin bir tus takimi gelecektir
Fig. 3-2-6
Bu tur butona bastiginizda
ekrana tus takimi gelecektir.
3-12
3-2-4 Sabit sayi girme (Set Constant) Butona basildiktan sonra HMI ayarlarda belirlenmis sabit sayiyi PLC 'nin ilgili adresine
yollayacaktir.
Fig. 3 -2 -7 Sabit sayi girme
Fig. 3 -2 -8 Sabit deger girmeSabit deger girme ayarlari:
1. , Sabit sayinin kaydedilecegi adres.
Deger birimi
Deger formati
Sabit sayi
Sakla ve cik Saklamadan cik
0.durum ve yazisi
Genel ayarlarin yapilabil-
digi pencere.
3-13
2. ,
, Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.
3. ,Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
4. ,Buton stilinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
(Gorunmez buton)
Buton stili
5. ,
Kullanici seviyesini belirler.
7. , : sets the
Deger uzunlugu ve formatini belirler
Bir biti deger girme isleminden once yada sonra set etmek icin kullanilir. Not: Bu fonk- siyon ilgili biti sadece ON eder. Eger tekrar ayni bit set edilmek isteniyorsa baska bir yontemle OFF etmek gerekir.
3-14
8. : Butona basildiginda kaydolacak sabit degeri belirleriz.
Ornek:
Butona bastigimizda HMI PLC'nin ilgili adresine (D1000) sabit sayiyi yollayacaktir.
3-2-5 Arttirma/Azaltma(Increment/Decrement)
Bu butona bastigimizda ,HMI PLC 'nin ilgili adresindeki sayiyi arttirip azaltir.Eger deger maximum degeri asicak olursa maximum deger PLC 'ye kaydolur.
3-15
Fig. 3 -2 -9 Arttirma/Azaltma buton ayarlari
Fig. 3-2 -10 Arttirma/Azaltma buton ayarlari
Buton yazisi
Deger birimiData formati
+/- miktari
Sakla ve cik Saklamadan cik
Alt ve ust limit
Buton stili
Maximum minimum sinir-
larin atlama miktarinin
ayarlanabildigi bolum
0.konum ve yazisi
3-16
Arttirma /azaltma buton ayarlari:
1. ,Arttirilan/azaltilan adres.
2. ,,
Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.
3. , Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
4. , Buton stilinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
(Invisible button)
Element style
5. Butonun tipini yeniden yapilandirmaya gerek kalmaksizin degistirir.
6. Kullanici seviyesini ayarlar.
Ornek:
3-17
D1000 datasinin icerigini +/- butonlariyla degistirir.
3-2-6 Sayfa gecisi (Goto Screen)
Butona bastigimizda HMI belirledigimiz sayfayi acacaktir.
Iki sekilde kullanilabilir : 1 . Sayfa Degistir (Change screen):Butona basilinca belirlenen sayfa acilir. 2 . Bir onceki sayfaya git (Back to previous screen):Bu buton bir onceki
sayfayi acar.
Fig. 3 -2-11 Sayfa degistirme
Ayarlar:
1. Uygulamanin gerceklesecegi adres.
Buton yazisi
Gidilecek sayfa
Uygulama adresi
Buton stili
3-18
2. , ,
, Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.
3. Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
Sayfa gecis secenekleri
4. , Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
5. , Buton stilinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
(Gorunmez buton)
6. : Changes element character directly without Butonun turunu degistirir (Goto screen veya Previous main screen)
3-19
7. Kullanici seviyesini belirler.
8. : Gidilecek sayfa numarasi secilir.
Ornek:Farkli butonlarla farkli sayfalara gecis.
3-2-7 Sistem Fonksiyon Butonlari (System Function Button)
Sistem fonksiyon butonlari
Button tipi Makro Read Write IsleviSystem Date &
Time No No No HMI 'in tarih ve zamanini ayarlar
(Yil:ay: gun,saat:dakika:saniye) Password table
setup No No No Kullanici seviye sifrelerini ayarlar
Enter password No No No Sifre koyma imkani saglar. Contrast & Brightness
No No No HMI 'in kontrast/Parlaklik ayari.
Low security No No No Butona basildiginda HMI en dusuk kullanici seviyesine gecer (seviye 0).
System menu No No No Butona basildiginda sistem menuacilir.
Table 3-2-2 Sistem fonksiyon butonlari
3-20
Sistem fonksiyon butonlari6 farkli sistem fonksiyon butonu vardir bunlar: System Date & Time,
Password table setup, Enter password, Contrast & Brightness, Low security ve system menu butonlaridir.
Fig. 3-2-12 Sistem fonksiyon buton ayarlari
Ayarlar:
1. , ,
, Yazinin fontu,rengi,karakter buyuklugunu ayarlar.
2. , Buton seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.
3. , Buton stili ve onplan renginin ayarlandigi bolumdur.
Konum numarasi ve
yazisinin oldugu bolum.
Buton yazisi
Butonun stili
6 farkli secenek vardir.
3-21
(Gorunmez buton)
Buton stili
4. Buton turunun degistirilebilecegi bolumdur.
Sistem butonlari
a. Sistem Zamani&Tarihi(System Date & Time) HMI 'in sistem tarih ve saatini degistirme imkani kilar.Sistem tarih ve zamaninin
degistirilebilecegi kutucugun ekrana gelmesi icin bu tur butona basmak yeterlidir.
Sistem tarih ve zaman ayar kutucugu
b. Sifre tablosu (Password table setup) Bu tur butona basilinca kullanici seviyesine bagli olarak password
tablosu acilacaktir.HMI 'a yukledikten sonra eger sifre kullanici seviyeniz a-yarlanandan asagi ise bu tablo acilmaz.Eger password tablosunu actiysaniz
yalnizca sizin kullanici seviyenizden asagi olan sifreleri gorebilir ve degistirebi-lirsiniz,digerlerini goremez ve degistiremezsiniz.
Password tab losu
Sola tasi
Saga tasiArttirir
Azalt
3-22
5.seviye password tablosu
c . Sifre girme (Enter password)
Bu buton sifre girmek icin ekrana digital bir tus takimi ge- tirir.Kullanici seviyesini degistirmekicin kullanilir,En ust kullanici sifresini girilirse
en ust kullanici seviyesine sahip olunur.
Sifre girme sayfasi
d. Kontrast&Parlaklik (Contrast & Brightness) Bu butona basilinca acilan pencereden HMI 'in kontrast ve parlaklik
ayarlari yapilabilir.
Kontrast & Parlaklik ayar penceresi e. Dusuk guvenlik (Low security)
Bu buton kullanici seviyesini en disuk seviye yapar (level 0).Bu ayarlari kullanicinin farkli sayfalara gitmesini ,sistem parametrelerini degistirip hatalara
Onayla ve cik
Sil
Pencereyi kapat Gi iris
3-23
sebeb vermesini engellemek icin kullanilir. (Sayfa degistirirkende bu fonk-siyon kullanilabilir)
f. Sistem menu (System menu)
Sistem menu butonuna basildiginda HMI sistem menusu acilacaktir. Uygulamaya geri donmek icin RUN 'a basilmali veya restart yapilmalidir.
5. Uygulamanin kullanici seviyesini belirler.
Ornek:
HMI System Menu
3-3 Ibre (Meter)
Meter options
Ibre tipi S ekil Islevi
Meter (1) Meter (2) Meter (3)
Ayarlanmis adresin degerinin ust limitin ustundemi yoksa alt limitin altindami oldugunu farkli renkler ile goruntulemeye yarar.gs Ayarlar kisminda degerin max/min siniri,skala ve ibrenin rengiayarlanabilir.
Table 3-3-1
Uygulamayi calistir
Yukleme yapilacak
COM port secimi
SMC karti veya dahili
hafizayi sil veya kopyala
Parlaklik ayari
Zaman ayari Kalibrasyon
Sistem ayarlari
3-24
Ibre ayarlari penceresinden ibrenin gorunusunu alt ve ust degerleri ve renkleri,bolme sayisini arkaplan rengi ayarlanabilir.Ayarlari yaptiktan sonra HMI otomatik olarak
oransal olarak ayirarak gostergeyi girilen degerlere gore farkli renklerde gosterecektir.
Fig. 3-3-1 Gosterge ayarlari
Sagdaki sayfanin goruntu
lenmesi icin tiklanir.
3 farkli data formati
secilebilir.
3-25
Fig. 3 -3 -2 Gosterge ayarlari
1. : Gostergenin okuma yapacagi adres.
2. ,,
Yazinin fontu,rengi,karakter buyuklugunu ayarlar.
Deger birimiDeger
formati
Max./Min.
for inputting
Sol pencere icin
tiklanir.
Enable range
limit setting
Upper/lower bound
Noktadan once ve
sonraki rakam
sayisi
Hedef ve alt ust degerler ayarla-
nabilir secilirse:
Hedef adres =read adres + 3
Ust sinir adres =read adres + 2
Alt sinir adres =read adres +1
3-26
3. , Gosterge stili ve onplan renginin ayarlandigi bolumdur.
Standard Raised Sunken
Meter border Style
5. ,
Virgulden once ve sonraki rakam sayisi ayarlanir.
6. , : sets color Alt ve ust sinir bolgelerinin rengini ayarlar.
7. : Ibrenin rengi ayarlanir.
8. ,Olcegin ve rakamlarin rengi ayarlanir.
9. , : sets value
Data formati ve birimi ayarlanir.
10. , : set the max.
Minimumve maximumdegerler ayarlanir.
11. , ,
Hedef deger ayarlanir.
12. , ,
Aralik ayarlanir.
13. :Hedef degerin ve alt ust araligin sabit veya degisken olmasi secenegidir.Ornek olarak hedef deger :sabit secilirse (low limit=9999), 2. degisken
3-27
secilirse ,Dn+3 datasinin degeridir .(=D1003) Alt deger:1.sabit secilirse (low limit=0), 2.ayarlanabilir secilirse Dn+ 1 datasinin dege-
rine esittir.(=D100 1) Ust deger:1.sabit secilirse (low limit=2500),2.ayarlanabilir secilirse= Dn+ 2 datasinin de-
gerine esittir.(=D100 2) Ornek:
3-4 Cubuk Grafik (Bar)
Bar type Icon Function
Normal
bar
Deviation bar
Bir adresin icerigini cubuk grafik seklinde cizdirmek icin kul-
lanilir,boylece adresin artan ve azalan icerigi goruntulenmisolur. Degerin alt limitin altinda veya ust limitin ustundemi ol-
dugu farkli renkler kullanilarak gosterilebilir.Ayrica max./min., dege ayarlari,arkaplan renk ayarlarida yapilabilir.
Table 3-4-1
2 cesit cubuk grafik vardir: 1. Normal bar: HMI plc 'den okudugu datayi degeri oraninda cubuk grafik seklinde
gosterir.
2. Deviation bar: HMI plc'den okudugu datayi standart degerle karsilastirir ve standart degerin altinda veya ustunde olarak cizer.
3-4-1 Normal Bar
3-28
Fig. 3-4 -1Bar ayarlari
Fig. 3 -4 -2 Normal bar ayarlari
Grafik yazisi
Soldaki pencere icin
tiklanir.
Alt-ust aralik renkleri
Grafik stiliDisplay format secimi.
Deger birimi
Deger formati
Max./Min.
deger araligi Sol pencere icin tiklanir
Aralik ayarlari aktif
Giris deger limiti
Target ve Ust/alt limit ayarlanabilir ise,
Target adres = read adres + 3
Ust limit adresi = read adres + 2
Alt limit adresi = read adres +1
3-29
1. : Cubuk grafigin adresi
2. , ,
, Yazinin fontu,rengi,karakter buyuklugunu ayarlar.
3. ,Nesnenin stilini ayarlar.
Standard Raised Sunken
Bar style
4. Cubuk grafikin yonunu secer (Asagidan yukari,sagdan sola vb.).
Grafik yonu
5. , Ust alt sinir rengini ayarlar.
3-30
6. , : setting data
Deger birimi ve formatini ayarlar.
7. ,
Max./Min. degeri ayarlar.
8. , ,
Hedef deger secimi.
9. , ,
Aralik secimi.
10. Hedef deger ve ust alt limit degerinin ayarlanabilir secimi.Hedef deger: Sabit secilirse (Alt limit=9999), degisken secilirse =Dn+ 3 adres in in
icerigine esittir.(=D1003) Alt limit degeri: Sabit secilirse (Alt limit=0), Degisken secilirse = Dn+ 1adres in in
icerigine esittir.(=D100 1) Ust limit degeri: Sabit secilirse (Ust limit=2500), Degisken secilirse = Dn+ 2 adres in in
icerigine esittir.(=D100 2) 3-4-2 Sapma Deger Bar (Deviation Bar)
3-31
Fig. 3 -4-3 Ayarlar
Fig. 3-4-4 Ayarlar
Grafik yazisi
Ayar sayfasi icin
tiklanir.
Grafik stili2 farkli display
formati secilebilir.
Deger birimi
Max. /Min. sinir
araligi.
Sol pencere icin tiklanir.
Sapma deger siniri
Standart deger ve sapma degeri ayarlanabilir ise,
Standart deger= read adres +1
Sapma degeri=read adres +2
Deger formati
3-32
1. : Grafik icin adres secimi.
2. , ,
, Yazinin fontu,rengi,karakter buyuklugunu ayarlar.
3. , : user can Grafik stilini ayarlar.
Standard Raised Sunken Sapma deger grafik stilleri
4. : Display bar action direction Grafik yonunu ayarlar (Yatay,dikey).
3-33
5. ,
Deger birimi ve formati ayarlanir.
6. , : setting
Grafik max/min sinirlari.
7. , ,
, ,
: Standart deger ve sapma deger ayari:
Sabit secilirse (ornege gore =0), degisken ise = Dn icerigiyle karsilastirir.
(=D1000) ve standart deger Dn+1(D1001). Eger sapma miktari ust limitdenDn+2(D1002)daha buyuk ise, grafikte bu miktar farkli renklerde gozukecektir.
Ornek:
Read: PLC 'nin ilgili datasinin cubuk grafigi
3-34
3-5 Pay Grafik (Pie Graph)
Buton tipi
Icon Islevi
Pie (1) Pie (2) Pie (3) Pie (4)
Belirlenmis adresin degerini pay grafikolarak goruntulemek icin kullanilir.Artan veya azalan pay miktarina gore degerin miktarini.
anliyabiliriz.Deger alt ve ust limitlerin disinda farkli renkler kullani-larak goruntulenir.
4 farkli stilde pay grafik vardir.Ayarlari kullanarak grafigin renklerini alt/ust sinirlari
max., min. degerleri,ayarlayabiliriz.
Fig. 3-5-1 Pay grafik ayarlari
Grafigin yazisi
Ayarlar sayfasi icin
tiklanir.
Grafik stili
3-35
Fig. 3-5 -2 Pay grafik ayarlari
1. : Pay grafigin okuyacagi adres.
Deger birimi
Deger formati
Max./Min.
degerleri
Sol pencere icin tiklanir.
Aralik ayarlari
Giris degerin limiti Hedef deger ve alt/ust limit ayar-
lanabilir ise.
Hedef deger = read adres + 3
Ust limit deger= read adres + 2
Alt limit deger= read adres +1
3-36
2. , ,
, Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugu ayarlanir.
3. , Grafigin stili ve onplan renginin secilebilcegi yerdir.
4. ,Ust/alt bolge rengi.
5. , : sets data
Deger birimi ve formati.
6. , : sets
Girisin max./min. degeri.
7. , , : sets
Araligin alt ve ust degerleri.
8. : Hedef deger ve ust/alt deger ayarlari secimi .
Hedef deger: Sabit secilirse girilen sayiya esittir.ayarlanabilir secilirse Dn+ 3 adresinin iceregine esittir.(=D1001)
Alt limit degeri:Sabit secilirse girilen degere (low limit=0),ayarlanabilir secilirse Dn+ 2 adresinin icerigine esittir.(=D100 2)
Ust limit ayarlari:Sabit secilirse girilen degere (high limit=2500), ayarlanabilir secilirse Dn+ 1 adresinin icerigine esittir.(=D100 3)
Ornek:
3-37
3-6 Indikator (Indicator)
Indikator
tipi Icon Islevi
Multistate
indicator PLC 'nin ilgili kontaginin (on/off) yada adresinin durumunu gosterir
Range indicator
PLC 'nin ilgili bitinin yada adresinin degerini alt sinir
degeriyle karsilastirir,karsilastirma sonucuna gore farkli konumlar goruntulenir.
2 tip indikator vardir: 1. Multistate indicator: PLC 'nin ilgili kontaginin (on/off) yada adresinin durumunu gosterir
Konumnumarasi secilen birime gore degisecektir.(Value: 256 konum, LSB: 16 konum, BIT: 2 konum) Indikatorun gorunusu yazi veya sekil olabilir.
2.Range indicator: PLC 'nin ilgili adresini araligin alt degeriyle karsilastirir,karsilastirma
sonucuna gore ilgili konumu ekranda goruntuler.
3-6-1 State Indicator
State indicator PLC 'nin ilgili bitini goruntulemek icin kullanilir.Bit, LSB veya WORD olarak konum degistiginde ilgili konuma ait mesaji,sekli goruntuleyecektir.Eger adres
onemli bir isaretci,mesaj yada alarm ise state indikator; gorunusunu ,yazisini degistirerekkullaniciyi bilgilendirecektir.
3-38
Fig. 3 -6 -1 Indikator ayarlari
1. :State indikatorun okuyacagi adres.
Konum numarasi ve
Konum numarasi
ve yazisi.
Indikatorun yazisi
Deger tipi
Sagdaki pencere
için tiklanir. Konum sayisi
Deger formati
degisme imkani
3-39
2. ,
, Yazinin fontunun,renginin,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.
3. , Secilen nesneye resim eklemek için kullanilir.
4. Secilen nesnenin onplan rengi ayarlanir.
5. , : sets value
Adresin birimi ve formati ayarlanir.
Example:
3-6-2 Range Indicators
PLC 'nin ilgili adresini araligin alt degeriyle karsilastirir,karsilastirma sonucuna
gore ilgili konumu ekranda goruntuler.
3-40
Fig. 3-6-2 Range indikator ayarlari
Fig. 3 -6-3 Range indikator ayarlari
Konum numarasi
ve degisme imkani.
Konum numarasi ve
yazisi.
Nesnenin yazisi
Deger birimi
Sagdaki pencere için
tiklanir. Konum sayisi.
Deger formati
Soldaki pencere için tiklanir.
Aralik limit
ayarlari
3-41
1. : Indikatorun okuyacagi adres.
2. ,
, Yazinin fontunun,renginin,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.
3. ,Secilen nesneye resim eklemek için kullanilir.
4. Secilen nesnenin onplan rengi ayarlanir.
5. ,
Adresin birimi ve formati ayarlanir.
6. : Konum sayisini arttirip azaltma.(Value: 256 konum, LSB: 16 konum, BIT: 2 konum)
3-42
7. , , ,
Konumlarin alt deger ayari.Bu bolum sabit yada ayarlanabilir secilir.(KonumKonumun alt degeri Dn+1,2,3… (konum numarasi-1) 'e esittir.
Ornek:
Konum sayisi 5 ve value range =4 olsun,
Range (sabit) 0=400 1=300 2=200 3=100 Range (ayarlanabilir) Dn+1 Dn+2 Dn+3 Dn+4
3-7 Deger Goruntuleme (Data display)
Buton tipi ...ikon islevi
Numeric display Istenilen adresin icerigini goruntuler.
Character display Adresin karakter(ascii) icerigini goruntuler.
Date display HMI tarihini goruntuler.Time display HMI zamanini goruntuler.
Day-of-week display Haftanin gununu goruntuler.
Prestored message Konuma ait mesaji goruntuler.
Moving sign Konuma ait mesaji hareketli olarak goruntuler. 3-7-1 Deger goruntuleme (Num eric Display)
PLC 'nin ilgili adresinin icerigindeki sayiyi goruntulemek icin kullanilir.
3-43
Fig. 3-7-1 Numeric display ayarlari
3-7-2 Karakter goruntuleme (Character Display)
HMI; PLC 'nin ilgili bolgesindeki ascii kodlari okuyup karakter olarak ekrandagoruntuleyecektir. (max.uzunluk 28 word)
Virgulden once ve son-
raki rakam sayisi
Data tipi secimi
Goruntulenecek adres
Nesnenin stili
3-44
Fig. 3 -7 -2 Karakter goruntuleme ayarlari
3-7-3 Tarih goruntuleme (Date display) HMI 'in sistem tarihini goruntuler.
Okunacak adresAdres goruntuleme
Dizgi uzunlugu
Nesne stili
3-45
Fig. 3-7-3 Tarih goruntuleme ayarlari
3-7-4 Zaman goruntuleme (Time Display) HMI 'in sistem zamanini goruntuler.
Tarih goruntuleme formati
Nesne stili
3-46
Fig. 3 -7-4 Zaman goruntuleme ayarlari
3-7-5 Haftanin gununu goruntuleme (Day -of-week Display) Haftanin gununu goruntuler.
Nesne stili
Goruntuleme formati
3-47
Fig. 3-7-5 Day-of-week display settings
3-7-6 Mesaj goruntuleme (Prestore Message)
PLC 'nin ilgili kontaginin yada bolgesinin durumuna gore mesaj goruntuler.Ayarlar kisminda her konum icin mesajlar yazilablir.
Text kismina tiklanarak gun
ismi degistirilebilir.
Nesnenin stili
3-48
Fig. 3 -7 -6 Ayarlari
3-7-7 Kayan mesaj goruntuleme (Moving Sign Display)
PLC 'nin brlirlenmis adresinin degerine gore ilgili konuma ait mesaj kayarak
goruntulenir.Ayarlar kisminda yazinin kayma hizi ve benzeri ozelikleri ayarlanabilir.
Okunacak adres
Konum sayisi
Mesaj goruntuleme
Mesaj
Nesne stili
3-49
Fig. 3-7-7 Kayan yazi ayarlari
3-8 Grafik (Graph Display)
Buton tipi Ikon islevi
State graphic
HMI 'i PLC 'ye bagladigimizda HMI 'in ekraninda PLC
tarafindan kontrol edilen farkli resimler goruntulene-cektir.
Animated
graphic
HMI 'i PLC 'ye bagladigimizda HMI 'in ekraninda PLCtarafindan kontrol edilen bir resim goruntulenecektir.
Resmin X ve Y eksenlerindeki konumu plc tarafindankontrol edilecektir.
3-8-1 State graphic
HMI 'i PLC 'ye bagladigimizda HMI 'in ekraninda PLC tarafindan kontrol edilenfarkli resimler goruntulenecektir.
Okunacak adres
Kayan yazi
Konum yazisi
Konum sayisiKayma hizi
Nesne stili
3-50
Fig. 3-8 -1 Konum grafik
1. : Okunacak adres
Okunacak data
Resim secimi
State graphic
Konum numarasi
Degisim hizi
3-51
2. , Konum resimlerinin secilebilecegi kisimdir.
3. ,
Deger birimi ve formatinin ayarlanabildigi kisimdir.
4. Konum sayisi secilebilir.Eger birim WORDsecilirse,1 -256 konum secilebilir, LSB icin 1-16 konum ,bit ise 2 konum secilebilir.
5. , Konumlarin degisme hizi.
Example:
Okunacak adres = D100 olsun. Secilen konum ve sekilleriden sonra D100 'un degerine gore gorunumu:
D100=1 D100=2 D100=3 D100=4 D100=5 D100=6 D100=7 3-8-2 Animasyon (Animated graphic)
HMI 'i PLC 'ye bagladigimizda HMI 'in ekraninda PLC tarafindan kontrol edilen
bir resim goruntulenir.Resmin X ve Y eksenlerindeki yerini PLC 'nin ilgili datasinindegeriyle belirlenir.
3-52
Fig. 3 -8-2 Animasyon ayarlari
1. Animasyonu gerceklestirecek adres secimi.
Animasyon
Okunan adres
Konum sayisi
3-53
2. , Resim secilen kisimdir.
3. ,
Deger birimi ve formati.
4. Konum degistiginde bir onceki resmi sil-silme secimi.
5. Konum sayisi secilebilir.Eger birim WORDsecilirse,1 -256 konum secilebilir, LSB icin 1-16 konum ,bit ise 2 konum secilebilir.
Example: Secilen adres =D100 olsun,
Secilen resim ve yeri asagidaki gibi olacaktir.Konum kontrol adresi Dn+1
X-ekseni kontrol adresi Dn+2
Y-ekseni kontrol adresi Dn+3
3-9 Deger girme (Input)
Buton tipi Ikon Islevi
Numeric Entry PLC 'nin bir bolgesine sayisal deger girmek icin kulla-nilir.
Character Entry
PLC 'nin bir bolgesine karakter girisi yapmak icin kulla-nilir.
Okunacak ve yazilacak adres girme imkaniyla kullanici yazdigi girisi yada farkli bir adresin degerini goruntuleyebilir.
3-54
3-9-1Deger girme (Numeric Entry)
Fig. 3 -9 -1 Deger girme ayarlari.
Deger birimi
Deger formati
Sol penceri icin
tiklanir.
Max. /Min. ayarlari
Virgulden once ve sonraki
rakam sayisi
Trigger tipi
Okunacak adres
Renk ve stil
ayarlari.
3-55
Fig. 3-9 -2 Deger girme ayarlari
1. , Deger girisi yapilacak adres.
2. ,,
Yazinin rengini,fontunu,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi kisimdir.
3. , : user can Nesnenin stilinin secilebildigi kisimdir.
Standard Raised Sunken
4. , Kullanicinin PLC 'nin belirlenmis bir bitini deger girme isleminden once yada sonraON etmesini saglar.Bu ozellik kullanilarak ilgili bit sadece ON yapilabilir.
3-56
5. Kullanici seviyesini belirler.
6. ,
Data uzunlugunu ve birimini secmeye imkan kilar.
7. ,
Girilebilcek Min./Max. deger ayarlanir.
8. ,
Noktadan once ve sonraki rakam sayisi ayarlanabilir.
Ornek: Deger girme butonuna bastigimizda PLC 'nin belirtmis oldugumuz adresine deger
girmemizi saglayacak asagidaki gibi bir tus takimi ekranda belirecektir.
3-9-2 Karakter Girme (Character Entry)
HMI PLC 'nin ilgili bolgesindeki ASCII kodlarini okur ve ekrana karsiliklari
olan karakterleri yazar. (max. uzunluk 28 word)
Girilen deger.
Bastigimizda asagidaki tus
takimi acilir.
3-57
Fig. 3-9-3 Karakter girme ayarlari
1. , Giris yapilacak adres.
Nesne stili
3-58
2. , ,
, Yazinin rengi,fontu ve karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi kisimdir.
3. ,Nesnenin stili.
Standard Raised Sunken
4. Kullanici seviyesinin ayarlanabildigi kisimdir.
Ornek: Butona bastigimizda HMI 'in ekranina, karakter girisi yapabilecegimiz bir klavye
gelecektir.
Karakter girisi butonuna
bastigimizda asagidaki
pencere acilacaktir.
3-59
3-10 Egri (Curve)
Curve tipi Ikon Islevi
Trend graph
PLC 'nin belirlenmis adresindeki degerin degisimini grafiksel olarakyalnizca Y ekseni boyunca gosterir.
X-Y Chart PLC 'nin belirlenmis adresindeki degerin degisimini grafiksel olarak. The X ve Y ekseni boyunca gosterir.
Egri olusturulurken ilk once “curve field total” kismindan egri sayisi ayarlanmalidir.(1 -4 araliginda secilebilir). Daha sonra,okunacak adres ,egri kalinligi rengi ve deger ayar-
lari yapilmalidir. 3-10-1 Degisim grafigi (Trend Graph)
HMI ,PLC 'nin ilgili adresinin dizi olarak iceriginin degisimini goruntuler.Ornek olarak 100 ornek noktasi ve 4 egri secilmis olsun.Boyle bir secimde 100 X 4 =400 bolge
olacaktir.Delta PLC 'nin okunacak adresi D0 secelim.Bu durumda 400 word okunacaktir. (D0~D399). Ayarlarimiza gore 1.egri D0~D99 datalarini 2.egri D100 ~D199 datalarini,3.egri
D200 ~D299 datalarini, 4.egri D300~D399 datalarinin icerigini Y ekseni boyunca cizer.Eger maxsimum degerin uzerinde bir deger varsa maximum olarak,eger minimum degerin
altinda bir deger varsa minimum deger olarak goruntulenir.Ayarlardan sonra;okuma isleminibaslatacak kontrol adreside girilmelidir. (bknz. bolum 5)
3-60
Fig. 3 -10-1 Trend grafik ayarlari
Fig. 3-10 -2 Trend grafik ayarlari
Toplam egri sayisi
Soldaki pencere
icin tiklanir.
Grafik stili
3-61
Trend grafik ayarlari
1.
Grafigin renk ayarlari,stil ayarlarinin yapildigi bolumdur.
Standard Raised S unken Trend grafik stilleri
2. : Okunacak ornek adres sayisini belirler.
Okuma islemi bitince ornekleme islemide biter.
3. :PLC datasinin formatini belirler.
4. : Okunacak adresi belirler.
5. : Tetikleyici set eder,islem bayragini temizler.Islem
bayragi tetiklendiginde HMI okumaya ve egri cizmeye baslar.
6. : Egrilerin detay ayarlarini yapar.
7. , : Max./Min.
Y ekseni max/min degerleri.Eger okunan degerler bu ayarlarin altinda veya ustunde iseHMI ayrlarnan degerleri goruntuleyecektir.
8. , : setting
Egri genisligi ve renk ayari.
Ornek:
3-62
3-10-2 X-Y Grafik (X-Y Chart)
HMI ,PLC'nin ilgili adresinden itibaren bir dizi bilgiyi X-Y ekseni boyunca grafik-sel olarak goruntuler.Ornek olarak,100 ornekleme noktasi ve 4 egri secilmis olsun.
Boyle bir secimde 100 X 4 X 2= 800 nokta belirlenmis olacaktir.Yine ornek olarakX ekseni adresi Delta PLC'nin D0 ve Y ekseni adresi D500 bolgesi secilmis olsun,
HMI bu durumda 800 nokta okuyacaktir.(D0~D399 ve D500~D899).1.egri X ekseni boyunca D0 ~D99,Y ekseni boyunca D500~D599 adreslerinin degerini;2.egri X ekseni
boyunca D100 ~D199,Y ekseni boyunca D600~D699 adreslerinin degerini;3.egriX ekseni boyunca D200 ~D299,Y ekseni boyunca D700~D799 adreslerinin degerini
4.egri X ekseni boyunca D300 ~D399,Y ekseni boyunca D800~D899 adreslerinin de-gerini goruntuler.X-Y grafigin cizime baslamasi ,temizlenmesi gibi ayarlari icin bolum 5'e
bakiniz.
3-63
Fig. 3-10 -3 X-Y Chart ayarlari
Fig. 3 -10-4 X-Y Chart ayarlari
Sol pencere icin tiklanir
Grafik stili.
Toplam egri sayisi
3-64
Ayarlar:
1.
Standard Raised Sunken
X-Y Chart style
2.
Okunacak ornek sayisini belirler.
3. : PLC datasinin formatini belirler.
4. ,
Okunacak adresi belirler.
5. : : Tetikleyici set eder,islem bayragini temizler.Islem
Okuma islemi bitince ornekleme islemide biter.
6. :Egri ayarlari girilir.
7. , ,
, Max./Min.
X ekseni/Y-ekseni Max./Min. deger ayarlari girilir.
3-65
8. ,
Egri kalinligi ve rengi ayarlari.
Ornek:
3-11 Ornekleme (Sampling)
Gecmisteki datalari tablo halinde veya grafik seklinde goruntuler.Gerekli ayarlar
yapildiktan sonra gecmis datalari okuyabilmek ve grafigi cizdirebilmek icin kontrol adres-sinde girilmesi gerekir.(Bkz.bolum 5)
3-66
Fig. 3-11-2 Buffer ayarlari
a . Read address:Okunacak adres.(Ornek D100)
b . Size (word) and total: Okunacak adres sayisi.Ornek olarak 8 giri l irse; D100, D101,D102,...,D107 okunur.
Total:Alinacak ornek sayisi.
3-67
c . Stamp time and data: Datanin degerini ve zamani goruntule.
d . Auto stop:Ornek sayisi giri len toplam degeri astiginda orneklemedevam etsin yada etmesin secimi.Ornek olarak,total 5000 secilmis
ve auto stop secilmemis ise,5001'inci okudugu ornek i lk data olarak kaydolur.
e . Trigger: Tetikleyici secimi (HMI veya PLC).Eger PLC secilirse
ayarlar icin bolum 5'e bakiniz.
f. Cycle: Ornekleme zamani.
g. Non-volatile: Elektrik kesintisinde gecmis datalari saklasin saklamasin secimi. 3-11 -1 Gecmis Deger Grafigi (Historical Trend Graph)
Gecmisteki degerleri egri olarak HMI ekraninda cizer.
Fig. 3 -11-3 Historical trend graph ayarlari
Egri sayisi
3-68
Fig. 3-11 -4 Historical t rend graph ayarlari.
Ayarlar:
1. , Grafigin renk ayarlarinin yapildigi bolumdur.
2. : PLC'nin ilgili adresini okuyacak buffer secimi.
(Buffer sayisi #1 'den #12 'ye kadar secilebilir.Buffer ayarlari icin
butonuna basilir yada menu bardan Options > History setup.
3. : PLC datasinin formatini belirler.
4. ,
X ve Y eksenin Max./Min. degerlerini belirler.
Sol pencere icin tiklanir.
secilebilir.
3-69
5. , ,
: Tarih ve zamanin goruntulenme
formatini belirler.
6. :Egri ayarlari yapilir.
7. : Tetikleme icin okunan ornek numarasini ayarlar.
Okuma isleminden sonra ornekleme biter.
8. ,
Egrinin genislik ve renk ayari.
Ornek:
3-11 -2 Gecmis Deger Tablosu (Historical Data Table)
Gecmisteki datalari tablohalinde HMI ekraninda goruntuler. Buffer numarasi
data no'nun benzeridir.
3-70
Fig. 3-11-5 Historical data table ayarlari
Ayarlar:
1. , Tablonun renk ayarlari bolumdur.
2. PLC'nin ilgili adresini okuyacak buffer secimi.
(Buffer sayisi #1 'den #12 'ye kadar secilebilir.Buffer ayarlari icin
butonuna basilir yada menu bardan Options > History setup
3. : PLC datasinin formati secilir.
4. ,
X ve Y eksenin Max./Min. degerlerini belirler.
Sol pencere icin tiklanir.Egri sayisi
Bufer secimi
secilir.
3-71
5. , ,
Tarih ve zamanin goruntulenme
formatini belirler.
6. : Egri ayarlari yapilir.
7. : Tetikleme icin okunan ornek numarasini ayarlar.
Okuma islemi bitince orneklemede biter.
8. , Noktadan once ve sonraki hane sayisini
belirler.
Ornek:
3-11 -3 Gecmis Olay Tablosu (Historical Event Table)
PLC 'nin ilgili datasinin icindeki degere gore olay tablosu olusturur.Ayarladigimiz
mesajlari HMI okuma islemlerini tamamladiktan sonra goruntuleyecektir.
3-72
Fig. 3 -11-6 Historical event table ayarlari
Ayarlar:
1.
, Yazinin rengini,fontunu karakter boyunu belirler.
2. , Cerceve rengini ve önplan rengini belirler.
3. ,
Data formatini ve konum sayisini belirler. WORD ise 256,LSB ise 16,bit ise maximum
2 konum yazilabilir.
4. : Tetikleme için okunacak örnek sayisi ayarlanir.
Okuma isleminden sonra örneklemede biter.
Konum sayisi
Data No.: bufer numarasi
(1- 12). The historical
buffer addres gecmis mesaj
lar i saklamak ic in kul lani l i r .
Bu fer adres i i l k once be l i r
lenmelidir.
Data type: Eger WORD seci-,
lirse max. 256 mesaj, LSB
secilirse max. 16 mesaj yazi-
labilir.
3-73
5. : PLC'nin ilgili adresini okuyacak buffer secimi.
Bufer sayisi #1 to #12 arasinda secilebilir.Bufer ayarlari icin
butonuna basilir veya menu bardan Options > History
6. , ,
: Tarih ve zamanin goruntulenme formatini
belirler.
Example: D100=0
D100=1 D100=2
D100=3
D100=4 D100=5
D100=6
3-12 Alarm
setup secilir.
3-74
Alarm tipi Ikon Islevi
Alarm
history table
HMI ,PLC 'nin ilgili bitinin durumunu okur ve ilgili alarm mesajinigerceklesme zamani ile birlikte ekranda goruntuler.
Butun alarm mesajlari saklanir ve alarm listesi olusturulur.
Active alarm list
HMI yalnizca aktif olan alarmi ekranda goruntuler.
Alarm frequency
table
HMI alarm mesaj zamanlarini alt alta goruntuler ve kaydeder.
Alarmlari ayarlamadan once ,PLC'nin ilgili adresini,kaydedecegi alarm sayisini ayarlamakgerekir.
3-12-1 Gecmis Alarm Tablosu (Alarm History Table)
HMI ,PLC 'nin ilgili bitinin durumunu okur ve ilgili alarm mesajini gerceklesme zamani ile birlikte ekranda goruntuler.Gecmis alarm tablosunu olusturmak icin butun
alarmlari kaydeder.
Fig. 3-12 -1 Gecmis Alarm Tablosu
3-75
3-12-2 Aktif Alarm Listesi (Active Alarm List)
HMI yalnizca aktif olan alarmi ekranda goruntuler.
Fig. 3-12 -2 Aktif alarm listesi
3-12-3 Alarm Frekans Tablosu (Alarm Frequency Table)
HMI alarm mesaj zamanlarini alt alta goruntuler ve kaydeder.
3-76
Fig. 3 -12-3 Alarm frekans tablosu
3-13 Grafikler (Graphics)
Eger menulerde olmayan farkli bir grafik olusturmak istiyorsa asagidaki secenekler
kullanilarak farkli grafikler olusturulabilir.
Fig. 3 -13-1 Grafik secenekleri
3-13-1 Cizgi (Line)
Line secenegini secildikten sonra mausenin sol tusuna basili tutulup istenilen cizgiboyunda suruklenip birakildiktan sonra cizgi olusturulmus olur.
3-77
Fig. 3-13 -2 Cizgi ayarlari
Fig. 3-13 -3 Cizgi yonleri Fig. 3 -13-4 Cizgi kalinliklari (1-8) 3-13-2 Dikdortgen (Rectangle)
Bir dikdorgen olusturmak icin 'Rectangle' secenegi secildikten sonra sol tusa
basilir istenilen olculerde suruklenir ve birakilir.
Fig. 3-13-5 Dikdortgen ayarlari
Resim bankasindan resim secimi
Cizgi kalinligi Arka plan Var/Yok
Onplan rengi
Cizgi rengi
3-78
3-13-3 Daire (Circle)
Fig. 3-13-6 Daire ayarlariDaire yapmak icin dikdortgen olculeri kullanilir.Eger en=boy ise daire olur,
aksi takdirde elips olur.Dairenin rengini ayarliyabilir yada transparan yapabiliriz.
Fig. 3-13-7 Transparent “No ”iken Fig. 3-13-8 Transparent is “No ”iken
Fig. 3-13-9 Transparent “Yes”iken Fig. 3-13 -10 Transparent “Yes”iken 3-13-4 Cokgen (Polygon)
Her sol tusa basidiginda cokgenin kosesi belirlenmis olur.Butun koseler secildikten sonra
sag tusa basilarak cokgen olusturulur.Renk ve olculeri seceneklerden ayarlanabilir.
3-79
Fig. 3-13 -11 Cokgen ayarlari
Fig. 3-13-12 Fig. 3-13-13 Fig. 3-13-14
Fig. 3 -13-15 Fig. 3 -13-16 Transparan cokgen
3-13-5 Yay (Arc)
Yay olusturmak icin mausenin sag tusuna basili olarak suruklenir ve birakilir.
Eger transparan secenegi 'Yes' secili ise cizilen sekil yay olacaktir eger 'No' secili isebir kesme olacaktir.
Fig. 3 -1 3-15 Yay ayarlari
Fig. 3-13 -16 Transparent “No” iken Fig. 3 -13-17 Transparent “Yes”iken
3-13-6 Yazi (Text)
Ekrana yazi yazmak icin kullanilir.Yazinin arka planindaki dikdorgenin renginin gorunmesi icin transparan 'No' secilmelidir.
3-80
Fig. 3 -13-18 Text ayarlari
3-13-7 Skala (Scale)
Yonu,skala degerleri olan bir skala olusturmak icin kullanilir.
Fig. 3 -13-19 Skala ayarlari
Yazi girisi
3-81
Fig. 3 -1 3-20 Skala ayarlari
3-13-8 Tablo (Table)
Tablo olusturmak icin kullanilir.Hucrelerin olculerini,gorunus ve renklerini ayarlayabilir,farkli elementlerle kullanarak daha islevsel yapabiliriz.
Deger birimi
Deger formati
Sol pencere icin
tiklanir
Min. deger
Max. deger
Tam/kesir sayi
ayarlari
3-82
Fig. 3-13 -21 Tablo ornegi
Row header:Bas satir rengini ayarlar.
Column header: Bas sutun rengini ayarlar.
Row interlacing: Satirlarin rengini ayarlar.
Column interlacing: Sutunlarin rengini ayarlar
Sep. row evently: Satir olculerini esitler.
Sep. column evently: Sutun olculerini esitler.
4-1
Bolum 4 Makro Makrolar ile calismak HMI kullanicisi icin cok uygundur.Olusturulan makrolari online
olarak yada download etmeden offline olarak test etme imkani vardir.
Herbir makro icin 512 satir ve 128 word(max.) uzunlugunda komut yazilabilir.
Sub-macro sayisi 512' ye esittir. (1-512).
Fig. 4-1 Uygun calisma ve kolay anlasilabilirlik icin
makrolari alt makrolar halinde prog-
ramlariz.
Alt-macro makrolar numaralariyla isimlendirilir.
Alt-makro(n) (n=1-512).
Fig.4-2 Yandaki pencerede en sol sutundaki rakamlar alt-macro numarasini belirtir.
512 adet alt-macro vardir ve bunlari 'CALL'
komutuyla calistirabiliriz.
4-2
4-1 Makro Tipi (Macro Type)
Fig. 4-1-1 Menubardan makro secimi
Makro ismi Sayisi Aciklamasi
Screen open Macro
1 Her sayfa icin bir sayfa acilis makrosu secilebilir.Toplam sayfa
sayisi n ise n adet sayfa acilis makrosu yazilabilir.
Screen close Macro
1 Her sayfa icin bir sayfa kapanis makrosu secilebilir.Toplam say-
fa sayisi n ise n adet sayfa kapanis makrosu yazilabilir.
Screen Cycle Macro
1 Her sayfa icin bir sayfa dongu makrosu secilebilir.Toplam sayfa
sayisi n ise n adet sayfa dongu makrosu yazilabilir.
Initial Macro 1 Bir programda 1 acilis makrosu vardir. Background
Macro 1 Bir programda 1 arkaplan makrosu vardir.
Clock Macro 1 Bir programda 1 zaman makrosu vardir.
On Macro 1 Bir buton için bir ON makro yazilabilir.
Off Macro 1 Bir buton için bir ON makro yazilabilir.
Sub-macro 512 Bir programda 512 alt-makro kullanilabilir.
Table 4-1-1
Sayfa Acilis Makrosu (Screen Open Macro) Her sayfa icin bir sayfa acilis makrosu yazilabilir.Sayfa acilis makrosu sayfa her acildiginda
bir defa gerceklesir.Sayfa acildiginda bu makro gerceklesmeden diger elementler aktif
4-3
hale gelmez.Bu yuzden bu makroyu yazarken programin gecikmesine ve diger ele-
manlarin calismasini engellemeyecek sekilde dikkatli olunmalidir.Tavsiye edilen bu
tur makrolarin gerekmedikce cok uzun olmamasi ve programi HMI'ya yuklemeden
once online veya offline olarak calistirilip testinin yapilmasidir.
Sayfa Kapanis Makrosu (Screen Close Macro) Her sayfa icin bir sayfa kapanis makrosu yazilabilir.Sayfa kapanis makrosu sayfa her
kapandiginda bir defa gerceklesecektir.Sayfa kapanis makrosu gerceklesmeden acilan
yeni sayfanin makrosu gerceklesmiyecektir.Bu yuzden bu makroyu yazarken prog-
ramin gecikmesine ve diger elemanlarin calismamasina sebeb olacak hatalara karsi dik-
katli olunmalidir.
Sayfa Dongu Makrosu (Screen Cycle Macro) Her sayfa icin bir sayfa dongu makrosu yazilabilir.Sayfa dongu macrosu ait oldugu sayfa
her acildiginda gerceklesecek ve sayfa kapanana kadarsurekli devam edecektir. Bu nedenle uzun sayfa dongu makrolari yazimindan gerekmedikce uzak durulmalidir.
Baslangic Makrosu (Initial Macro) Bir programda yalnizca bir baslangic makrosu vardir.Baslangic makrosu programin ba-
sinda bir defa gerceklesir.Eger PLC 'nin ozel bir adresine ozel bir deger yazmak icin
isteniyorsa baslangic makrosu kullanilabilir.
Arkaplan Makrosu (Background Macro)
Bir programda yalnizca bir tane arkaplan makrosu vardir.Bu makro bazi komutlarla
bir defa aktif edilir ve surekli gerceklesir.Eger bu arada baska makrolarda gerceklesi-
yorsa ,ornek olarak dongu makrosu,arkaplan makrosu etkilenmez,beraber gerceklesmeye
devam ederler.Iki makroda ayni zamanlarda (aslinda sirayla)fakat gerceklesme zamani
cok kisa ve surekli oldugu icin ayni zamanda gerceklestikleri kabul edilir.Bu tur makro icin
bir cevrim olusturmaya gerek yoktur END yazilsa dahi makro tekrar gerceklesecektir.
4-4
Zaman Makrosu (Clock Macro) Bir programda yalnizca bir tane zaman makrosu vardir.Programla beraber calismaya
baslar ve surekli gerceklesir(dongu makrosu gibi).Bu sebeple gerekmedikce uzun makrolar
yazmaktan kacinilmalidir.
ON Makro (ON Macro)Her kullanilan buton icin bir tane ON makro tanimlanabilir.Butona basildiginda
(Bit ON oldugunda) makro baslar ve birkez gerceklestikten sonra biter.Butona
her basildiginda ON makro birkez gerceklesir ve biter.
OFF Makro (OFF Macro) Her kullanilan buton icin bir tane ON makro tanimlanabilir.Ilgili buton off edildiginde
OFF makro birkez gerceklesir ve biter.Her defasinda buton off edildiginde OFF makro
birkez gerceklesir ve biter.
Alt-makro (Sub-macro) Toplamda 512 alt-makro vardir.Alt-makrolar bir programdaki subrutinlere (alt program)
benzer.Ornek olarak ozel bir fonksiyon icin 10 tane alt-makro varsa bunlari bir makroda
toplayabiliriz.Bu fonksiyonu makro 1'e yazdigimizi kabul edelim.Bu fonksiyonu kullana- bilmek icin bir makronun icine 'CALL 1' yazmamiz yeterlidir.Eger makro 1'de bir degisiklik
yapmak istiyorsak sadece ilgili alt-makroyu degistirmemiz yeterlidir.
4-2 Makro Hazirlama (Macro Edition)
Istenilen makro tipini menu bardan sectikten sonra acilan pencerede bir satira tiklanir ve ve makro yazilmaya baslanir.
4-5
Fig. 4-2-1 Makro hazirlamak
Makro yazilabilecek 512 tane satir vardir ( Fig. 4-2-3). Eger programda bos bir satir varsa program guncellendikten sonra bu bos satirlar komut satirina donusecektir(Fig 4-2-4).
Fig. 4-2-4 Makro arac cubugu
4-6
Fig. 4-2-3 Makronun son satiri
Fig. 4-2-4 Bos satirlar komut satiri olur
Makro yazmaya baslamak icin bir satira tiklanir ve sekil 4-2-5'deki pencere acilir.Komut
yazmak icin Command butonuna tiklanir ve devam edilir.
4-7
Fig. 4-2-5 Makro hazirlama sayfasi
Dosya (File)
Fig. 4-2-6 Dosya
Makro Acma (Open Macro) Uygun makroyu olusturmak icin eski hazirlanmis makrolarda kullanilabilir. Kullanici eski
makrolari acarak istedigi PLC tipinde kullanabilir (Fig.4-2-7).
4-8
Fig. 4-2-7 Makro acma
Makro Kaydetme (Save Macro) Hazirladigimiz makrolari daha sonra kullanabilmek icin saklayabiliriz.
.
Fig. 4-2-8 “Save as” Makro
Makro Kapama (Close Macro) Makroyu kapatmak icin kullanilir.
4-9
Edition Makrolar icin PLC adresleride kullanilabilir.Eger PLC adreslerini kullaniyorsak makro ayiraclarla diger hafiza makrolarindan ayirt edilecektir.
Fig. 4-2-9 Edition
Geri (Previous)
Secilen satiri bir ust satira kaydirmak icin kullanilir ( Fig. 4-2-10 ve Fig. 4-2-11).
Fig. 4-2-10 1.adim
4-10
Fig. 4-2-11 2.adim
Ileri (Next)
Secilen satiri bir satir asagi almak icin kullanilir. (Fig.4-2-12 ve Fig. 4-2-13.
Fig. 4-2-12 1.adim
4-11
Fig. 4-2-13 2.adim
Guncelle (Update)
Mevcut satirda yapilan degisiklikleri guncellemek icin kullanilir.Eger degisikliklerden
sonra Update'e basmazsaniz degisiklikler girilmemis olur ve tekrar yazilmasi gerekir.
(Fig. 4-2-14 ve Fig.4-2-15)
4-12
Fig. 4-2-14 1.adim
Fig. 4-2-15 2.adim
Ekle (Insert)
Secilen satirin bir ustune yeni bir satir eklemek icin kullanilir. (Fig. 4-2-16 ve Fig. 4-2-17).
4-13
Fig. 4-2-16 1.adim
Fig. 4-2-17 2.adim
Sil (Delete)
Secilen satiri silmekicin kullanilir ( Fig. 4-2-18 ve Fig. 4-2-19).
4-14
Fig. 4-2-18 1.Adim
Fig. 4-2-19 2.Adim
Komut (Comment)
4-15
Secilen satiri tanimlamak kullanilir.Menu bardan yada toolbardan secilebilir.
(Fig. 4-2-20 ve Fig. 4-2-21).
Fig. 4-2-20 1.Adim
Fig. 4-2-21 Step 2 of comment
Command Secilen satira komut girmek icin kullanilir.
4-16
Fig. 4-2-22 Menu bardan secimi
Fig. 4-2-23 Komut secenekleri Fig. 4-2-24 Aritmatik islemler
Fig. 4-2-25 Logic islemler Fig. 4-2-26 Data tasima
Fig. 4-2-27 Data transfer Fig. 4-2-28 Karsilastirma
4-17
Fig. 4-2-29 Flow kontrol Fig. 4-2-30 Bit ayarlari
Fig. 4-2-31 Haberlesme Fig. 4-2-32 Digerleri
Yardim (Help) Yardim konularina ulasmak icin kullanilir (Fig. 4-2-33).
Fig. 4-2-33 Yardim isteme
4-18
Fig. 4-2-34 Yardim konulari
Komut Yazma (Key in) Bazi kullanicilar makrolari klavyeyi kullanarak yazmak isterler.Bu sekilde yazilrsa
program otomatik olarak dogrulugunu kontrol eder. Eger yazimda hata varsa bir uyari
mesaji verir.Operantlar arasinda sinirsiz bosluk birakilabilir.
Fig. 4-2-35 Kalavye girisi
4-19
Giris islemi bittikten sonra program guncelleme yada enter tusuna bastiktan sonra
girisi en uygun formata donusturcektir.didn’t verify in this time.
Fig. 4-2-36 Convert to the best format
Eger bir hata varsa hata mesaji verecektir.
Fig. 4-2-37 Yanlis giris
Fig. 4-2-38 Klavye girisi
Eger girisin formati dogru ama kullanilan operant yanlis ise yine hata mesaji verir.
4-20
Fig. 4-2-39 Format dogru,operant yanlis
Fig. 4-2-40 Hata mesaji
4-3 Makro Islem komutlari (Macro Operation) Aritmatik islem komutlari (Arithmetic)
Bu kisimda 5 farkli komut vardir., bunlar; ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV ve MOD (Fig. 4-3-1). Her komut icin 3 operant vardir.Herbir operant dahili hafiza bolgesi yada sabit sayi
secilebilir(decimal veya hexadecimal) ,(fakat 3.operant dahili hafiza bolgesi olmalidir).
Birim ise Word, Double Word, Signed ve Signed Double Word secilebilir.
Komut Operant Data tipi Format Not
ADD A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S SUB A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S MUL A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S DIV A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S
MOD A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S
Eger datanin degeri datanin icine sig-
miyorsa fazla olan kisim (tasan kisim)
otomatik olarak atilacaktir.
M— Dahili hafiza, C—Sabit sayi, W—Word, D—Double Word, S—Signed
4-21
Fig. 4-3-1 Aritmatik islem secimi
TOPLAMA (ADD) ADD → Toplama islemi, formul: A1=A2+A3. A2 'yi A3'e ekler ve sonucu A1'e saklar. Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) + A3(Word). A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) + A3(Double Word). A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) + A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) + A3(Signed Double Word).
Fig. 4-3-2 Toplama
CIKARMA (SUB) SUB → cikarma islemi, formul: A1=A2-A3.A2 'den A3 'u cikarir sonucu A1 'e yazar.
Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) - A3(Word). A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) - A3(Double Word).
4-22
A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) - A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) - A3(Signed Double Word).
Fig. 4-3-3 Cikarma
CARPMA (MUL) MUL → Carpma islemi, formul: A1=A2 * A3. Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) * A3(Word). A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) * A3(Double Word). A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) * A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) * A3(Signed Double Word).
Fig. 4-3-4 Carpma
BOLME (DIV) DIV → Bolme islemi, formul: A1=A2 / A3. (A3 operanti sifir olmamali)
Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) / A3(Word).
4-23
A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) / A3(Double Word). A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) / A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) / A3(Signed Double Word).
Fig. 4-3-5 Bolme
MOD MOD → Kalan islemi, formula: A1=A2 % A3. A1 (A3 sifira esit olmamali)
Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) % A3(Word). A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) % A3(Double Word). A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) % A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) % A3(Signed Double Word).
Fig. 4-3-6 Kalan
Lojik Islemler (Logical Operation)
4-24
5 adet lojik islem komutu vardir.Bunlar; including OR, AND, XOR, SHL ve SHR 'dir Her islemin 3 operanti vardir.Herbir operant dahili hafiza bolgesi yada sabit sayi
secilebilir(decimal veya hexadecimal) ,(fakat 3.operant dahili hafiza bolgesi olmalidir).
Datalarin birimleri Word ve Double Word.
Komut Operant Datatipi Format Digerleri OR A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D --
AND A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D -- XOR A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D -- SHL A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D -- SHR A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D --
M— Dahili hafiza, C—Sabit sayi, W—Word, D—Double Word.
Fig. 4-3-7 Lojik islemleri
OR OR → lojik OR islemi, formul: A1=A2 | A3. A2(Word) ve A3(Word) datasinin bit olarak lojik OR kapisina sokar sonucu A1(Word)'e yazar.
Operantlarin birimleri DWord 'de olabilir.
4-25
Fig. 4-3-8 OR Fig. 4-3-9 OR islemi
AND AND → lojik AND islemi, formul: A1=A2 & A3. A2(Word) ve A3(Word) datasinin bit olarak lojik AND kapisina sokar sonucu A1(Word)'e yazar.
Operantlarin birimleri DWord 'de olabilir.
Fig. 4-3-10 AND Fig. 4-3-11 AND islemi
XOR XOR → lojik XOR islemi, formul: A1=A2 ^ A3. A2(Word) ile A3(Word)'u lojik XOR kapisina sokar sonucu A1(Word)'e saklar. Operantlarin birimleri DWord 'de olabilir.
4-26
Fig. 4-3-12 XOR Fig. 4-3-13 Boolean operation
SOLA KAYDIRMA (SHL) SHL → Sola kaydirma islemi. Formul: A1=A2 << A3. A2(WORD/DWORD) datasinin bitlerini A3 'de yazan sayi kadar bit sola kaydirir.
Sola kaydirma islemiyle birlikte kayan bitin yerine datanin en sag bitine 0 gelir. Eger A1
word ise A3 16 'dan buyuk ise. A1 sifir olacaktir.
Fig. 4-3-14 SHL islemi
SAGA KAYDIRMA (SHR) SHR → Saga kaydirma islemi, formul: A1=A2 >> A3. A2(WORD/DWORD) datasinin bitlerini A3 'de yazan sayi kadar bit saga kaydirir.
Saga kaydirma islemiyle birlikte kayan bitin yerine datanin en sol bitine sifir gelir. Eger A1
word ise A3 16 'dan buyuk ise. A1 sifir olacaktir.
4-27
Fig. 4-3-15 SHR islemi
Data Tasima (Data move) 4 adet data tasima komutu vardir.Bunlar;MOV, BMOV, FILL ve CHR 'dir (Fig 4-3-16)
(Cikis yalnizca dahili hafiza olabilir)
Komut Operant Data tipi Format Digerleri MOV A1, A2 P, M, C W, D Data type for A1 only can
be P, M BMOV A1, A2, A3 P, M, C W Data type for A1 and A2
only can be P, M FILL A1, A2, A3 M, C W CHR A1, A2, A3 M, C W A2 is input string
P—PLC, M— Dahili hafiza, C—Sabit sayi, W—Word, D—Double Word
Fig. 4-3-16 Data tasima komutlari
4-28
TASIMA (MOV) A2 'deki datayi A1 'e tasir. A1(Word)=A2(Word) veya A1(DWord)=A2(DWord) olabilir. Tasima isleminden sonra A2 'deki datada bir degisiklik olmaz. A1 PLC bolgesi yada HMI bolgesi olabilir.Tasincak bilgi diger cihaza haberlesme hattindan tasinir.
.
Fig. 4-3-17 MOV
BLOK TASIMA (BMOV) BMOV → Blok tasima. BMOV (A1, A2, A3). Bu komut A2 'den baslayarak A3 'deki
sayi kadar datayi blok halinde A1 'den baslayarak yerlestirir.Data formati word'dur.Eger blok uzunlugu dahili hafizadan yada max PLC data bolgesinden daha uzun ise
compile islemi sirasinda ariza verecektir.
Fig. 4-3-18 BMOV
4-29
DOLDURMA (FILL) FILL → Doldurma islemi.Ornek olarak, FILL(A1, A2, A3) .Bu komut A1'den basliyarak
A3 'de belirtilen sayi kadar bolgeye A2 'deki bilgiyi yazar.(A2 datasinda bir degisiklik olmaz)
Eger data blogu dahili hafizadan yada max PLC data bolgelerinden daha uzun ise compile
islemi sirasinda hata verecektir.
Fig. 4-3-19 FILL
KARAKTER (CHR) CHR → Karakterleri ASCII kodlara cevirir.Ornek olarak, CHR(A1, “A2”) Bu komut A2 'deki karakter yada karakterleri ASCII 'ye donusturur , sonucu A1'e kaydeder.(max uzunluk 128 word)
Fig. 4-3-20 CHR
Data Donusturme (Data conversion) 11 cesit data donusturme komutu vardir.Bunlar; BCD, BIN, W2D, B2W, W2B, SWAP, XCHG, MAX, MIN, A2H ve H2A (Fig. 4-3-21).
4-30
Fig. 4-3-21 Komut secimi
Komut Operant Data tipi Format Digerleri BCD A1, A2 M W, D -- BIN A1, A2 M W, D --
W2D A1, A2 M W, S -- B2W A1, A2, A3 M, C W -- W2B A1, A2, A3 M, C W --
SWAP A1, A2, A3 M, C W -- XCHG A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D -- MAX A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S -- MIN A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S -- A2H A1, A2 M, C W -- H2A A1, A2 M, C W --
P—PLC, M— Dahili hafiza, C—Sabit sayi, W—Word, D—Double Word, S--isaretli
BCD BCD → Binary Coded Decimal.BIN bilgiyi BCD formatina donusturur.Ornek olarak, A1 = BCD(A2). Bu komut A2(Integer, Word veya DWord) bilgisini BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) donusturur ve sonucu A1(BCD, Word or DWord) bolgesinde saklar. A2'nin degeri
0~9999 arasinda veya Dword ise 0~99999999 arasinda bir tamsayi olmalidir.
4-31
Fig. 4-3-22 BCD
BIN Binary Coded Decimal → BCD bilgiyi BIN 'ye donusturur.Ornek olarak,A1 =BIN(A2). komutu A2(BCD, Word or DWord) bilgisini BIN bilgiye donusturur ve sonucu A1(BIN,Word, DWord) bolgesine kaydeder.A2 'nin degeri 0~9999 arasinda yada Dword ise 0~99999999
arasinda bir tam sayi olmalidir.
Fig. 4-3-23 BIN
W2D W2D → WORD bilgiyi DOUBLE WORD yapar.Ornek olarak, A1 = W2D(A2) komutu
A2 (Integer, Word) bilgisini double word (Integer, DWord) yapar ve sonucu A1 (Dword,signed veya unsigned) bolgesine kaydeder.A2 'nin (Word,unsigned) degeri 0~65535 arasinda yada A2 'nin (Word, signed) degeri -32768~32767 arasinda bir tam sayi
olabilir.
5-1
Bolum 5 Sistem Kontrol
Iki yollu haberlesmelerde ve DOP serisi ile tum markalardaki PLC'leri haberlestirebilmek icin HMI 'in kontrol ve durum bolgelerinin adreslerini bilmemiz gerekir.Bu ayarlara menubar-
dan Options > Model parameter secenekleriyle ulasilabilir.
Fig. 5 -1 Model parametere ayarlari
Fig. 5-2 Haberlesme Ayarlari
5-2
5-1 Kontrol Bolgesi (Control Area)
DOP serisi sistem kontrolunde cok onemli fonksiyonlarin gerceklestigi bolgedir.HMIPLC 'den kontrol edilebilir. Bu bolge sistem kontrol parametreleri ayarlari kismindan
ayarlanabilir.Bu bolge bir data blogundan olusur ve uzunlugu kullanilan fonksiyona gore 0 ile 8 WORD arasinda secilebilir. Ornek olarak recete fonksiyonu icin minimum 8
WORD secilmelidir.Her Word'un aciklamasi asagida mevcuttur.
Word
Numarasi Bolge Numarasi
0 S ayfa Numarasini Belirleyen Bolgedir.(SNIR)
1 Ko ntrol Flag Bolgesi (CFR) 2 E gri (Curve) Kontrol Bolgesi (CUCR) 3 Gecmis Ornekleme Bufferi Kontrol Flag Bolgesi (HBSR) 4 Gecmis Buffer'ini Temizleme Kontrol Flag Bolgesi (HBCR)
5 Recete Kontrol Bolgesi (RECR) 6 Recete Sayisi Bolgesi (RBIR) 7 Kontrol Flag Bolgesi 2 (CFR2)
n Sayfa Numarasini Belirleyen Bolge (SNIR)
Word Foksiyon
0 Sayfa degistirmek icin kullanilir.
SN IR ( Dn) bolgesi PLC 'den sayfa gecisini saglar.Ornek olarak Dn=D0 ise D0 bolge-sindeki sayi kac ise HMI o sayfayi acar.
n Kontrol Flag Bolgesi (CFR)
Bit Numarasi Foksiyon
0 Kullanilmaz
1 Ekran isigini kapatir. 2 Ekranin sesini kapatir.
3 Alarm buffer'i temizler. 4 Alarm counter'i temizler.
5-15 Kullanilmaz.
n Ekran Isigini Kapatma
Ekran isigini PLC'den acip kapatabiliriz.Eger Bit 1 'i On yaparsak isik soner,Off yaparsakisik yanar.
5-3
n Sesi KapatmakHMI sesini PLC'den kontrol edebiliriz.Eger Bit 2 'yi On yaparsak ses kapanir,Off ise ses
acilir.
n Alarm Bufferi Temizleme
PLC 'den alarm buferi temizlemek icin Bit3 'u 1 sn boyunca On-Off etmek yeterlidir. .
n Alarm Counteri Temizleme
PLC 'den alarm sayicisini temizlemek icin Bit3 'u 1 sn boyunca On-Off etmek yeterlidir..
n Egri (Curve) Kontrol Bolgesi (CUCR)
Bit Numarasi Foksiyon 0 Egri ornekleme kontrol bayragi 1
1 Egri ornekleme kontrol bayragi 2 2 Egri ornekleme kontrol bayragi 3 3 Egri ornekleme kontrol bayragi 4
4-7 Kullanilmaz
8 Egri temizleme bayragi 1 9 Egri temizleme bayragi 2 10 Egri temizleme bayragi 3
11 Egri temizleme bayragi 4 12-15 Kullanilmaz
n Egri Ornekleme Kontrol Bayragi (1 -4)
HMI egri orneklemesi PLC tarafindan kontrol edilebilir. Eger Bit0— Bit3 'den biri1 sn On-Off edilirse , HMI bir defa ilgili egri icin datalari okuyup bunlari egri grafik
yada XY grafik olarak goruntuleyecektir..
n Egri Temizleme Bayragi (1 - 4)
PLC'den HMI'in cizdigi egriyi temizleyebiliriz.Eger Bit8— Bit11'den hangisini 1 sn
boyunca ON/OFF yapar isek o egriyi temizlemis oluruz.
n Gecmis Ornekleme Buffer'i icin Kontrol Flag Bolgesi ( HBSR)
Bu ayarlardan once PLC 'nin adresini ayarlanmis olmalidir.Bufer orneklenmis datalarinHMI hafizasinda saklandigi bolgedir.Bufer adresinin ve uzunlugunun ayarlandigi ki-
simlar daha onceden anlatilmistir.
5-4
Fig. 5-3 Buffer parametere ayarlari (max. 12 kayit)
HMI, 12 orneklemenin buferlarinda saklanmasina.Bunun yaninda HMI orneklemezamaninin ayarini,ornek sayisini,gecmis buferi PLC 'iden temizleme imkanida kilar.
Her örnekleme yada temizleme 2 bolge tarafindan kontrol edilir.
Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon
0 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 1 1 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 2
2 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 3 3 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 4
4 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 5 5 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 6 6 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 7
7 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 8 8 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 9 9 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 10 10 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 11
11 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi12 12 -15 Kullanilmaz
n Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi HMI 'in ornekleme yapmasi PLC 'den kontrol edilebilir.Bir defa ornekleme bayragi
(sampling flag)tetiklenirse (1 sn ON yapilirsa) bir defa ornekleme y apar.Tekrar tetiklemeyapabilmek icin bayragi Off yapmamiz gerekir.
5-5
[Ornek] Delta PLC:
(1) Kontrol blogu D0 'dan itibaren 6 bolge olsun.
(2) PLC 'de bufer#1 'in okuyacagi bölge D200 olsun .
(3) Bufer #1'in genisligi ise 3 WORD olsun.
Bu durumda, PLC D200-D202 datalarini kaydettikten sonra D3 datasinin 0.bitini setedecektir.HMI 0.bitin Off 'dan On 'a gectigini gorunce,D200-D202 datalarini PLC 'den
otomatik olarak okuyup orneklenmis bir sekide backup RAM 'de saklayacaktir.
n Gecmis Buferini Temizleme Kontrol Flag Bolgesi (HBCR)
Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon 0 1.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 1 2.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler.
2 3.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 3 4.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler.
4 5.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 5 6.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 6 7.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler.
7 8.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 8 9.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 9 10.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 10 11.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler.
11 12.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 12-15 Kullanilmaz
n Gecmis Buferini Temizleme.
HMI'in cizmis oldugu trend grafigi PLC 'den temizleyebiliriz.Kontrol bayragini bir defa te-
tikledikmi (1 sn On etmek gerekir) grafigi cizen buferi temizleyecektir.Bayragi tekrar tetik-leyebilmek icin Off etmeliyiz.
n Recete Kontrol Bolgesi (RECR)
Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon 0 Recete numarasi degistir. 1 Receteyi oku. (PLC >HMI)
2 Receteyi yaz (HMI >PLC) 3-15 Kullanilmaz.
n Recete Yazma Kontrol Bayragi
5-6
PLC 'ye recete yazmak icin recete numarasini (N) kontrol bolgesine (RNR) yazmaliyiz.
(RNR),(Dn+5) ve kontrol bayragi bit #4 ON edilmelidir.Tekrar tetiklenebilmesi icin bay- ragi OFF etmeliyiz.
Ornek olarak:
Eger PLC 'ye 4 nolu recete yazilmak istiniyorsa (RCPNo=4), yazma kontrol bitibit#2 set edilir.(D5=4)
n Recete Numarasi degistirme
RCPNo hazirlanan recetelerin numaralarinin kaydedildigi dahili hafiza bolgesidir.
RCPNo degerini belirlenmis recete numarasi bolgesine (RBIR , Dn+ 6) recete numa- rasi (N) yazilarak ve recete numarasi kontrol bolgesinin (RECR) ilgili bayragi bit0
ON yapilarak (1 sn) degistirilebilir. Bu islemden sonra RCPNo degisecek ve receteyeait recete datalari (RCPW0-RCPWm) goruntulenecektir.Bu islemleri tekrar gerceklestire-
bilmek icin ayni bit OFF edilip tekrar ON edilmelidir.
n HMI 'ya Recete Yukleme
PLC 'den HMI 'ya recete yukleyebilmek icin ,recete numarasi recete numarasi bolge-
sine (RBIR ) Dn+6 yazilmali ve kontrol bolgesinin bit #1 'i ON edilmelidir (1 sn).ON (about 1 second).Fakat bu islemleri tekrar gerceklestirebilmek icin ayni bit OFF edi-
lip tekrar ON edilmelidir.
Ornek olarak:
Eger PLC 'deki datalar 12 numarali recete olarak kaydetmek istenirse D5 'in
1.biti ON edilmelidir (D5=2).
n Recete Numarasi Bolgesi ( RBIR)
Word Fonksiyon
0 Recete numarasi
RCPNo ,goruntulenmek yada aktarilmak istenen recetenin numarasini kontrol edildigi
dahili hafiza bolgesidir.Baska bir deyisle RCPNo degistirilerek aktarilacak recetededegistirilmis olur.
5-2 Durum Bolgesi (State Area)
Iki yollu haberlesmelerde ve DOP serisiyle tum markalardaki PLC'leri haberlestirebilmek icin
karsi cihazin verecegi cevaplarin gelecegi bölge belirlenmelidir.DOP serilerinde durum bolgesi bir data blogudur Dm=D10 (uzunlugu 7 WORD = D10-D16) gibi.Bu blogun gorevi
ve aciklamalari asagida verilmistir.
5-7
Word Numarasi Fonksiyonu 0 Genel Kontrol Durum Bolgesi (GCSR) 1 Sayfa numarasi Durum Bolgesi (SNSR)
2 Egri (Curve) Kontrol Durum Bolgesi (CCSR) 3 Gecmis Ornekleme Bufferi Durum Bolgesi(HSSR)
4 Gecmis Ornekleme Bufferi Temizleme Durum Bolgesi (HCSR) 5 Recete Durum Bolgesi (RESR) 6 Recete Numarasi Durum Bolgesi (RBSR)
n Genel Kontrol Durum Bolgesi (GCSR)
Bit Number Function
0 Sayfa durumu 1 -2 Kullanilmaz
3 Alarm Buffer temizleme durumu 4 Alarm Counter temizleme durumu
5 -7 Kullanilmaz 8 Kullanici seviyesi (Bit0) 9 Kullanici seviyesi (Bit1) 10 Kullanici seviyesi (Bit2)
11 Kullanici seviyesi (Bit3) 12 -15 Kullanilmaz
n Sayfa Durumu
Sayfa degisirken bu bit ON olur islem gerceklestikten sonra OFF olur.
n Kullanici Seviyesi Durumu
HMI calisiyorken kullanici seviyeleri:
Kullanici seviyesi 0 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=Off , bit10=Off
Kullanici seviyesi 1 ==>bit8=ON, bit9=Off, bit10=Off
Kullanici seviyesi 2 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=ON, bit10=Off
Kullanici seviyesi 3 ==>bit8=ON, bit9=ON, bit10=Off
Kullanici seviyesi 4 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=Off , bit10=ON
Kullanici seviyesi 5 ==>bit8=ON, bit9=Off, bit10=ON
Kullanici seviyesi 6 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=ON, bit10=ON
Kullanici seviyesi 7 ==>bit8=ON, bit9=ON, bit10=ON
Kullanici seviyesi 8 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=Off , bit10=Off, bit11=ON
5-8
n Sayfa Numarasi Durum Bolgesi
Word Fonksiyon
0 Acik olan sayfa numarasi
n Acik Olan Sayfa NumarasiAcik olan sayfa numarasi sayfa numarasi SNSR (Dm) durum bolgesinde saklanir.
Sayfa degistirildiginde yeni sayfa numarasi bu bolgeye kaydolur.
n Egri Kontrol Durum Bolgesi (CCSR)
Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon
0 Egri 1 ornekleme durumu 1 Egri 2 ornekleme durumu
2 Egri 3 ornekleme durumu 3 Egri 4 ornekleme durumu8 Egri 1 temizleme durumu
9 Egri 2 temizleme durumu10 Egri 3 temizleme durumu
11 Egri 4 temizleme durumu 4-7;12 -15 Kullanilmaz
n Egri Temizleme Durumu
HMI 'in cizmis oldugu egri yada XY grafik PLC'den temizleniyorsa,Egri kontrol durum
bolgesinin (D12) Bit08 -- Bit11 bitleri temizleme isleminden sonra ON olacaktir.Egri temizleme kontrol bolgesi bitleri (bit08-11) Off oldugunda bu bitlerde OFF olacaktir.
n Egri Ornekleme Durumu
Egri yada XY grafigi PLC 'den kontrol ediliyorsa,egri örnekleme durum bolgesi (D12) bitleri Bit0 — Bit3 orneklemeden sonra ON olur.Egri kontrol bolgesi D2 'nin ilgili bitleri
(bit0-3) Off oldugunda ,egri ornekleme durumbitleride OFF olur.
n Gecmis Buferin Ornekleme Durum Bolgesi (HSSR)
B it Numarasi Fonksiyon
0 Gecmis bufer 1 ornekleme durumu 1 Gecmis bufer 2 ornekleme durumu
2 Gecmis bufer 3 ornekleme durumu 3 Gecmis bufer 4 ornekleme durumu 4 Gecmis bufer 5 ornekleme durumu 5 Gecmis bufer 6 ornekleme durumu
6 Gecmis bufer 7 ornekleme durumu
5-9
Bit Number Function 7 Gecmis bufer 8 ornekleme durumu 8 Gecmis bufer 9 ornekleme durumu
9 Gecmis bufer 10 ornekleme durumu 10 Gecmis bufer 11 ornekleme durumu
11 Gecmis bufer 12 ornekleme durumu 12 -15 Kullanilmaz
n Degisim Grafigi Ornekleme Durumu
Degisim grafigi PLC 'den kontrol ediliyorsa, ornekleme durum bolgesi (D13) bitleri Bit0 -
Bit11 orneklemeden sonra ON olur.Ornekleme kontrol bolgesi D3 'un ornekleme kontrolbitleri Off oldugunda ornekleme durum bitleride OFF olur.
n Gecmis Buferini Temizleme Durum Bolgesi (HCSR)
Bit Number Function 0 Gecmis bufer 1 temizleme durumu 1 Gecmis bufer 2 temizleme durumu
2 Gecmis bufer 3 temizleme durumu 3 Gecmis bufer 4 temizleme durumu 4 Gecmis bufer 5 temizleme durumu
5 Gecmis bufer 6 temizleme durumu 6 Gecmis bufer 7 temizleme durumu 7 Gecmis bufer 8 temizleme durumu 8 Gecmis bufer 9 temizleme durumu
9 Gecmis bufer 10 temizleme durumu 10 Gecmis bufer 11 temizleme durumu
11 Gecmis bufer 12 temizleme durumu 12 -15 Kullanilmaz.
Degisim grafigi PLC 'den kontrol ediliyorsa ,durum bitleri (D14) Bit #0 --#11 ON olacaktir.Kontrol bitleri (D4 bolgesinin) Off oldugunda bu bitlerde OFF olur.
.
n Recete Durum Bolgesi (RESR)
Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon 0 Recete numarasi degisim durumu 1 Recete okuma durumu (PLC > HMI)
2 Recete yazma durumu (HMI > PLC)
3-15 Kullanilmaz.
5-10
n Recete Okuma Durumu
PLC 'den HMI 'ya recete transferi yapildiktan sonra,recete okuma kontrol biti BIT#1 (D16 bit1 )
ON olur.Recete kontrol biti (D16 bit1 ) Off oldugunda ,recete okuma durum bitide OFF olur..
n Recete Numarasi Durumu
Recete numarasi kontrol biti BIT#0 (D6 bit0 ) ON oldugunda,recete numarasinin degistigini
belirten bitte BIT#0 (D16 bit0 ) ON olur.degisme isleminden sonrada OFF olur..
n Recete Yazma Durumu
HMI 'dan PLC 'ye recete yazildiktan sonra, recete yazma durum biti BIT# 2 (D 16 bit2) ON olur.Recete kontrol biti Off (D6 bit2 ) oldugunda recete yazma durum bitide OFF olur.
.
n Recete Numarasi Durum Bolgesi (RBSR)
Word Fonksiyon
0 Kullanilan recetenin numarasi
Recete numarasi RCPNo PLC 'den veya HMI 'dan degistiginde recete numarasi durum
bolgesi (RBSR) (Dm+6) degisecektir.O anda kullanilan recete numarasi bu bolgede kaydolur,eger istenilirse goruntulenebilir.
5-3 Dahili Hafiza
n Dahili Hafiza Bolgesi (Okunabilir/Yazilabilir ) : $ Her bolge 1 word : $n (n : 0~ 65535) Her bolge 16 bit : $n.b (n : 0~65535, b: 0~15)
HMI 'da toplamda 16 bitlik 65536 dahili hafiza bolgesi ($0 ~ $65535) vardir.
n Kalici Dahili Hafiza Bolgesi (Okunabilir/Yazilabilir) : $M Her bolge 1 word : $Mn (n : 0~1023 ) Her bolge 16 bit : $Mn.b (n: 0~1023, b: 0~15)
HMI 'da toplamda 16 bitlik 1024 kalici dahili hafiza bolgesi ($0 ~ $1023) vardir.
n Kontrol Bolgesi (Okunabilir): CTRL Her bolge 1 word : CTRLn (n: 0~ Kontrol bolgesi buyuklugu -1)
Her bolge 16 bit : $CTRL.b (n : 0~ Kontrol bolgesi buyuklugu –1, b : 0~15) HMI 'in kontrol bolgesi PLC 'nin kontrol bolgesinden okunan datalarin saklandigi yerdir.
Kontrol bolgesi yalnizca okunabilir.Kontrol bolgesi buyuklugu ekran programi hazirlanirkenbelirlenen (model parametreleri-kontrol bolgesi) kontrol bolgesi ile aynidir.
n Recete Numarasi Bolgesi (Okunabilir/Yazilabilir): RCPNO
5-11
Recete numarasinin belirlendigi 16 -bitlik bolgedir.Toplam recete sayisi 64K olabilir.Recete hazirlanirken toplam recete sayisi ve bir recetenin uzunlugu belirlenir.
PLC recete numarasina gore bir receteyi okur veya bir receteye yazar..
n Recete Degerleri Bolgesi (R/W): RCPn HMI 'da recete degerlerinin saklandigi bolgedir.Bu degerler HMI programi hazirlik a-
samasinda iken belirlenip HMI'ya yuklenebilir.Bu bolgelere okuma/yazma yapmanin 2 yontemi vardir.Recete uzunlugunun L ve recete numarasinin N oldugunu dusunulurse
1. Recete Numarasini kullanarak:Bu yontemde recete numarasi ve degerleri kullanilir. Ornek olarak RCPNO=3 ele alinirsa, HMI 3 numarali recetenin datalarini
RCP0~RCP (L-1) 'dan okur ve daha sonra PLC RCPNO 3'un datalarini RCP0~RCP (L-1) bu bolgeden okur.Bu bolge musterek bolgede sayilabilir.
2. Tam adres kullanilarak:Bu yontem kullanilacak recetenin deger sayisi RCP (L-1)'den
buyukse kullanilir.Bu durumda 1.recetenin recete degerlerinin baslangic adresi RCP (1XL) 2. recetenin recete degerlerinin baslangic adresi RCP (2XL) olur.O halde,
n.recetenin m. wordu RCP (nxL+m) olacaktir.
RCP0 RCP1 RCP2 RCP (L-1)...
1xL 1xL+1 1xL+2 1xL+(L-1)2xL 2xL+1 2xL+2
...
...
...
2xL+(L-1)
...
NxL NxL+1 NxL+2 NxL+(L-1)
RCP0=1RCP0=2
RCP0=N
RCP0=X; (1<=X<=N)
20080122
Se
rie
s H
MI C
on
ne
ctio
n M
an
ua
l
Series HMI Connection Manual
ASIA
AMERICA
EUROPE
Delta Electronics, Inc. Taoyuan131-1, Xingbang Road, Guishan Industrial Zone,Taoyuan County 33370, Taiwan, R.O.C.TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-362-7267
Delta Electronics (Jiang Su) Ltd. Wujiang Plant31688 Jiangxing East Road, Wujiang Economy Development Zone, Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, People's Republic of China (Post code: 215200)TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.Tokyo Office Delta Shibadaimon Building, 2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-Ku, Tokyo, 105-0012, JapanTEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.Donghwa B/D 3F, 235-6, Nonhyun-dong, Kangnam-gu, Seoul 135-010, KoreaTEL: 82-2-515-5303/5 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302
Delta Electronics (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.8 Kaki Bukit Road 2, #04-18 Ruby Warehouse Complex, Singapore 417841TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228
Delta Products Corporation (USA)Raleigh OfficeP.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3939
Deltronics (The Netherlands) B.V.Eindhoven OfficeDe Witbogt 15, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands TEL: 31-40-2592850 / FAX: 31-40-2592851
www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation
*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-1
1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication
DOP-A Series
COM1
Mode PIN
RS-232
1 N.C
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 N.C
5 GND
6 N.C
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 N.C
COM2
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 PIN
RS-232 RS-422 RS-485
1 N.C RXD- D-
2 RXD RXD+ D+
3 TXD TXD+ D+
4 N.C TXD- D-
5 GND GND GND
6 N.C RTS- N.C
7 RTS RTS+ N.C
8 CTS CTS+ N.C
9 N.C CTS- N.C
NOTE
1) Mode 3 is for RS-485. Pin 2 & 3 are D+ and pin 1 & 4 are D-.
2) Grounding is highly recommended if RS-485 & RS-422 are used for long transmission.
3) DO NOT connect Frame Ground (FGND) to GND. Please connect FGND to the outer covering of
connector.
4) Transmission speed is relevant to distance and baud rate.
Pin1
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-2 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
DOP-AE Series
COM1
Mode PIN
RS-232
1 N.C
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 N.C
5 GND
6 N.C
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 N.C
COM2/COM3
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 PIN
RS-232 RS-422 RS-485 RS-232x2 RS-422x2 RS-485x2
1 N.C RXD- D- N.C RXD- D-
2 RXD RXD+ D+ RXD RXD+ D+
3 TXD TXD+ D+ TXD TXD+ D+
4 N.C TXD- D- N.C TXD- D-
COM2
5 GND GND GND GND GND GND
6 N.C RTS- N.C N.C TXD- D-
7 RTS RTS+ N.C TXD TXD+ D+
8 CTS CTS+ N.C RXD RXD+ D+
COM3
9 N.C CTS- N.C N.C RXD- D-
Pin1
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-3
DOP AS Series
COM1/COM3
Mode 1 Mode 2 PIN
RS-232 RS-232x2
1 N.C N.C
2 RXD RXD
3 TXD TXD
4 N.C N.C
COM 1
5 GND GND
6 N.C N.C
7 RTS TXD
8 CTS RXD
COM 3
9 N.C N.C
COM2
Mode 1 Mode 2 PIN
RS-422 RS-485
R- RXD- D-
R+ RXD+ D+
T- TXD- D-
T+ TXD+ D+
GND GND
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-4 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
1.2 Cable for Download
Download via COM Port
RS-232
DOP series HMI 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
PC 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)
Controller
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3) (2) RXD
GND (5) (5) GND
RTS (7) (8) CTS
CTS (8) (7) RTS
上視圖
Download via USB Flash Drive
USB Connection
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-5
1.3 Supported Controllers and Devices
Please refer to the following table for supported controllers and devices provided by DOP series HMI.
Brand Controller Name / Series Name
Delta Controller For Servo/AC drive/Temperature Controller/PLC (984 RTU mode / ASCII mode) Delta
Delta DVP PLC
MicroLogix PLC Allen Bradley
SLC5 PLC
Cimon Loader Protocol
Copley Servo (Stepnet Protocol)
Danfoss VLT 2800 (FC Protocol)
Emerson EC20 Series PLC
Facon FB Series PLC
Festo Festo PLC
GE Fanuc 90 Series SNP PLC
Hitachi EH Series
Hust Hust CNC Controller
Nano Series PLC Jetter
JC Series PLC
Keyence KV/KZ Series
SU/DL Series Koyo
K-Sequence
Lenze LECOM-A/B Protocol
Master-K120S/200S
Glofa GM6 CNET
Master-K CNET LG
XGT CNET
LI YAN LYPLC EX
M2i Master M2i
M2i Slave
Matsushita FP Series
Mirle FAMA SC
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-6 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Brand Controller Name / Series Name
FX / FX2N
FX3U
A Series/J71UC24
Mitsubishi A2A/A2AS/A2USH A1SH/A3N/A2ASH CPU Port
Q Series CPU Port
Q Series Computer Link
FX Series Computer Link
Mitsubishi
J2s Series
BY125
CT150 MKS
MC700/720
Modbus (Master) --- 984 RTU / ASCII mode
Hexadecimal Address (Master) --- RTU / ASCII mode
nW (Master) --- RTU / ASCII mode Modbus
Modbus (Slave) --- RTU / ASCII mode
Uni-Telway TSX Micro
Modbus RTU Modicon
TWIDO
Moeller Moeller PLC
NIKKI DENSO NCS-FI/FS Series
C Series
CJ1/CS1 Series Omron
TPM1A
S7 200
S7-300 (with PC Adaptor) Siemens
S7-300 (without PC Adaptor)
Taian TP02 PLC
Vigor M Series
VIPA VIPA PLC
Yokogawa ACE PLC
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-7
Delta (Servo/AC Drive/PLC/Temperature) Controller Back to Table
A. HMI factory setting
Baud rate: ASCII: 9600, 7, None, 2.
RTU: 9600, 8. None, 2.
Controller station number: 1.
Control area/status area: None.
NOTE
1) This driver can support all Delta products, i.e. AC drive, PLC, Servo, Temperature Controller and
Modbus standard connection. The users can easily set and communicate with these devices via using
this driver.
2) For people who are using Modbus standard connection:
Modbus / ASCII (Master), Modbus / 984 RTU (Master), Modbus / ASCII Hex Address (Master) and
Modbus / RTU Hex Address (Master) can be compatible with the new Delta controller ASCII and Delta
controller RTU. To change the driver settings, the user only needs to change the “Controller” Option
which is used to set the controller, then the new driver can be used immediately.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
Servo communication address SERVO-n n: 0 ~ 0700h N/A Word
AC drive communication address INVERTER-n n: 0 ~ 2299h N/A Word
TCntrl communication address TEMP_CTRL-n n: 0 ~ 6000h N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_X PLC_Xn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_Y PLC_Yn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_M PLC_Mn n: 0 ~ 1520, N/A Word
1536 ~ 4080 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_S PLC_Sn n: 0 ~ 1008 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_T PLC_Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_C PLC_Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_D PLC_Dn n: 0 ~ 4095, N/A Word
4096 ~ 9999 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_HC PLC_HCn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word
PLC communication address Module PLC_Modulen n: 4000 ~ 4499h N/A Word
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-8 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
Output Registers RW-n n: 0 ~ FFFFh N/A Word
Input Registers R-n n: 0 ~ FFFFh N/A Word
Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word
Input Registers Wn n: 30001 ~ 40000 N/A Word
NOTE
1) The above addresses of Servo, AC drive, Temperature controller and PLC Module are in hexadecimal
format. PLC Word Device X and Y are in octal format. Other PLC Word Device M, S, T, C, D and HC are
in decimal format.
2) WORD_DEVICE_ X / WORD_DEVICE_Y / WORD_DEVICE_M / WORD_DEVICE_S: Address must be
0 or the multiple of 16.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Servo communication address SERVO-n.b n: 0 ~ 0700h b: 0 ~ f
AC drive communication address INVERTER-n.b n: 0 ~ 2299h b: 0 ~ f
TCntrl communication address TEMP_CTRL-n.b n: 0 ~ 6000h b: 0 ~ f
Servo Digital Input SERVO_DI-n N/A n: 1 ~ 8
Servo Digital Output SERVO_DO-n N/A n: 1 ~ 5
WORD_DEVICE_X PLC_Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
WORD_DEVICE_Y PLC_Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
WORD_DEVICE_M PLC_Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 1535
1536 ~ 4095
WORD_DEVICE_S PLC_Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 1023
WORD_DEVICE_T PLC_Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
WORD_DEVICE_C PLC_Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
TCntrl Bit communication address TEMP_CTRLB-n N/A n: 800 ~ 8FFh
Discrete Outputs RWB-n N/A n: 0 ~ FFFFh
Discrete Inputs RB-n N/A n: 0 ~ FFFFh
Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 10000
Discrete Inputs Bn N/A n: 10001 ~ 20000
NOTE
1) The above addresses of Servo, AC drive, Temperature controller and PLC Module are in hexadecimal
format.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-9
2) PLC Word Device X and Y are in octal format. Other PLC Word Device M, S, T, C, D and HC are in
decimal format.
3) Servo Digital Input and Servo Digital Output are only for Servo.
Pay close attention to the following important notes:
4) For Delta AC drive:
Communication address for HMI read/write address uses hexadecimal format. For detailed information
about communication address of Delta AC drive, please refer to Delta AC drive “User Manual”.
Example 1: Parameter 9-01 of Delta VFD-S drive Transmission Speed needs to be set to INVERTER901
in HMI. (Decimal 9 is converted to 09 in hexadecimal and 01 is converted to 01 in hexadecimal.
Therefore, setting INVERTER901 to HMI will discard the first 0)
Decimal value
Hexadecimal value
01 (Hexadecimal value)
09 (Hexadecimal value) The communication address of parameter 9-01 is 0901H.
Example 2: if setting of parameter 8-17 (Lower Bound of DC Braking Start-up Frequency) of Delta VFD-
S drive is desired, user needs to set INVERTER811 in HMI. (8 is converted to 08 in hexadecimal and 17
is converted to 11 in hexadecimal. Therefore, setting the INVERTER811 to HMI will discard the first 0)
Decimal value
Hexadecimal value
11 (Hexadecimal value)
08 (Hexadecimal value) The communication address of parameter 8-17 is 0811H.
5) For Delta Servo drive:
HMI Read/Write address setting needs to input the communication address listed in SERVO “User
Manual”.
Servo Digital Input and Servo Digital Output are only for Servo.
6) For Delta Temperature Controller (DTA series):
HMI can be set up to connect to several Delta A series temperature controllers on standard Modbus
networks by using RTU transmission mode. However, the communication delay time may need to
increase. Therefore, 5ms or longer is highly recommended.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-10 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
Delta Servo
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller CN3 cable connector (RS-232)
Controller CN3 cable connector
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TX
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(4) RX
(1) GND
1
2
3 5
4 6 Top View
RS-422
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller CN3 cable connector (RS-422)
Controller CN3 cable connector
(RS-422)
RXD+ (2) (5) TX+
RXD- (1)
TXD+ (3)
(6) TX-
(3) RX+
TXD- (4) (4) RX-
1
2
3 5
4 6 Top View
RS-485
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller CN3 cable connector (RS-485)
Controller CN3 cable connector
(RS-485)
RXD+ (2) (3) 485+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1)
(5) 485+
(4) 485-
TXD- (4) (6) 485-
1
2
3 5
4 6 Top View
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-11
Delta AC drive
RS-485
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-485)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-485)
RXD+ (2) (4 ) SG+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1 )
TXD- (4) (3 ) SG-
GND (5) (2 ) GND
Top View
DO NOT use Pin 1, 5 and 6 whileusing RS-485 communication.
61
2: GND3: SG-4: SG+
NOTE
1) When connecting to a Delta VFD-M series AC drive, please connect Pin 5 (GND) of the Delta HMI and
Pin 2 (GND) of the Delta VFD-M AC drive.
Temperature Controller
RS-485
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller RS-485 cable connector
RXD+ (2) D+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1)
TXD- (4) D-
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-12 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Delta DVP PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, Even, 1.
Controller station number: 1.
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
X_Data Xn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A
Y_Data Yn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A
M_Data Mn n: 0 ~ 1520, 1536 ~ 4080 N/A
S_Data Sn n: 0 ~ 1008 N/A
T_Register Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A
C_Register Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A
D_Register Dn n: 0 ~ 4095, 4096 ~ 9999 N/A
HC_Register Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A
NOTE
1) (W) is “Word”.
2) (DW) is “Double Word”.
3) X_Data / Y_Data / M_Data / S_Data: Address must be 0 or the multiple of 16.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
X_Data Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
Y_Data Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
M_Data Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 1520, 1536 ~ 4080
S_Data Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 1023
T_Coil Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
C_Coil Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-13
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232 Connection
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (5) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(4) RXD
(8) GND
Top View
RS-485 Connection
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller RS-485 cable connector
RXD+ (2) D+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1 )
TXD- (4) D-
1 4 5
8
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-14 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
AllenBradley MicroLogix PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory setting
Baud rate: 19200, 8, None, 1.
PLC station number: 1.
Control area/status area: B3:0/B3:10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range
Bit No. Register Type Format
Word No. Low Byte
High Byte File No.
Output File O:n n: 0 ~ 3 N/A 0
Input File I:n n: 0 ~ 3 N/A 1
Status File S2:n n: 0 ~ 65 N/A 2
Bit File B3:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 3
Timer Flag T4:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 4
Timer Preset Value T4:n.PRE n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 4
Timer Accumulator Value T4:n.ACC n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 4
Counter Flag C5:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 5
Counter Preset Value C5:n.PRE n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 5
Counter Accumulator Value C5:n.ACC n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 5
Control File R6:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 6
Control Size of Bit Array R6:n.LEN n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 6
Control Reserved File R6:n.POS n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 6
Integer File N7:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 7
Bit No : Low byte is not used, so the value is 0. High byte stores file number.
Data Size : Word.
T4, C5 and R6 only read 1 Word once.
If reading multiple Words once, the communication speed of PLC will be slow.
NOTE
1) After last communication data has been memorized by PLC (PLC will send 0x10 0x05 consecutively),
communication may fail. At this time, power off and power up HMI or power off and power up PLC once.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-15
Contacts
Read/Write Range
Bit No.
Low Byte High Byte Contact Type Format
Word No.
Bits File No.
Output O:n/b n: 0 ~ 3 b: 0 ~ 15 0
Input I:n/b n: 0 ~ 3 b: 0 ~ 15 1
Status S2:n/b n: 0 ~ 65 b: 0 ~ 15 2
Bit B3:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 3
Timer T4:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15
T4:n/EN n: 0 ~ 255 15
T4:n/TT n: 0 ~ 255 14
T4:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13
4
Timer Preset Value T4:n.PRE/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 4
Timer Accumulator Value T4:n.ACC/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 4
Counter flag C5:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15
C5:n/CU n: 0 ~ 255 15
C5:n/CD n: 0 ~ 255 14
C5:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13
C5:n/OV n: 0 ~ 255 12
C5:n/UN n: 0 ~ 255 11
C5:n/UA n: 0 ~ 255 10
5
Counter Preset Value C5:n.PRE/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 5
Counter Accumulator Value C5:n.ACC/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 5
Control R6:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15
R6:n/EN n: 0 ~ 255 15
R6:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13
R6:n/ER n: 0 ~ 255 11
R6:n/UL n: 0 ~ 255 10
R6:n/IN n: 0 ~ 255 9
R6:n/FD n: 0 ~ 255 8
6
Control Size of Bit Array R6:n.LEN/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 6
Control Reserved R6:n.POS/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 6
Integer N7:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 7
Bit No : Low byte stores Bit address. High byte stores file number.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-16 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232 Connection
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (7) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(4) RXD
(2) GND
(3) RTS
(6) CTS
Top View
1 4 37
2
6
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-17
AllenBradley SLC5 PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory setting
Baud rate: 19200, 8, None, 1.
PLC station number: 1.
Control area/status area: B3:0/B3:10.
NOTE
1) Error Check uses CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check).
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range
Word No. Bit No.
Low Byte High Byte Register Type Format
Element No. Slot or File No.
Output File O:n O:s.n
n: 0 ~ 30 N/A Slot No. s = 0 s: 0 ~ 255 File No. = 0
Input File I:n I:s.n
n: 0 ~ 30 N/A Slot No. s = 0 s: 0 ~ 255 File No. = 1
Status File S2:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A File No. = 2
Bit File Bf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 3.
Timer Flag Tf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.
Timer Preset Value Tf:n.PRE n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.
Timer Accumulator Value Tf:n.ACC n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.
Counter Flag Cf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.
Counter Preset Value Cf:n.PRE n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-18 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Read/Write Range
Word No. Bit No.
Low Byte High Byte Register Type Format
Element No. Slot or File No.
Counter Accumulator Value Cf:n.ACC n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.
Control File Rf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.
Control Size of Bit Array Rf:n.LEN n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.
Control Reserved File Rf:n.POS n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.
Integer File Nf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 7.
Bit No : Low byte is not used, so the value is 0. High byte stores file number.
Contacts
Read/Write Range
Word No. Bit No.
Low Byte High Byte Contact Type Format
Element No.Bits Slot or File No.
Output O:n/b O:s.n/b
n: 0 ~ 30 b: 0 ~ 15 Slot No. s = 0 s: 0 ~ 255 File No. = 0
Input I:n/b I:s.n/b
n: 0 ~ 30 b: 0 ~ 15 Slot No. s = 0 s: 0 ~ 255 File No. = 1
Status S2:n/b n: 0 ~ 31 b: 0 ~ 15 2
Bit Bf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 3.
Timer Tf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15
Tf:n/EN n: 0 ~ 255 15
Tf:n/TT n: 0 ~ 255 14
Tf:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13
f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.
Timer Preset Value Tf:n.PRE/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-19
Read/Write Range
Word No. Bit No.
Low Byte High Byte Contact Type Format
Element No.Bits Slot or File No.
Timer Accumulator Value Tf:n.ACC/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.
Counter Flag Cf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15
Cf:n/CU n: 0 ~ 255 15
Cf:n/CD n: 0 ~ 255 14
Cf:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13
Cf:n/OV n: 0 ~ 255 12
Cf:n/UN n: 0 ~ 255 11
Cf:n/UA n: 0 ~ 255 10
f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.
Counter Preset Value Cf:n.PRE/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.
Counter Accumulator Value Cf:n.ACC/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.
Control Rf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15
Rf:n/EN n: 0 ~ 255 15
Rf:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13
Rf:n/ER n: 0 ~ 255 11
Rf:n/UL n: 0 ~ 255 10
Rf:n/IN n: 0 ~ 255 9
Rf:n/FD n: 0 ~ 255 8
f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.
Control Size of Bit Array Rf:n.LEN/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.
Control Reserved Rf:n.POS/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.
Integer Nf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 7.
Bit No : Low byte stores Bit address. High byte stores file number.
NOTE
1) Device O and I need to assign Slot No. (s). If not assign Slot No., it will use default setting 0.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-20 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB female
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) SG
(7) RTS
(8) CTS
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-21
Cimon PLC (Loader Protocol) Back to Table
A. HMI factory setting
Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1, RS-232.
PLC station number: 1.
Control area/status area: D00000 / D00010.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
Input Xn n: 000-512 N/A Word
Output Yn n: 000-512 N/A Word
General Purpose Relay Mn n: 000-999 N/A Word
General Purpose Relay Ln n: 000-999 N/A Word
Latch Relay Kn n: 000-999 N/A Word
Flags Fn n: 000-127 N/A Word
Timer (Set) TSn n: 0000-4095 N/A Word
Timer (Current) TCn n: 0000-4095 N/A Word
Counter (Set) CSn n: 0000-4095 N/A Word
Counter (Current) CCn n: 0000-4095 N/A Word
General Purpose Word Data Dn n:00000-31999 N/A Word
Step Controller Sn n: 0-99 N/A Byte
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Xnb n: 000-512 b: 0-F
Output Ynb n: 000-512 b: 0-F
General Purpose Relay Mnb n: 000-999 b: 0-F
General Purpose Relay Lnb n: 000-999 b: 0-F
Latch Relay Knb n: 000-999 b: 0-F
Flags Fnb n: 000-127 b: 0-F
Timer Status Tb N/A b: 0-4095
Counter Status Cb N/A b: 0-4095
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-22 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 6 pin RJ11
Controller 9 pin D-SUB female
(RS-232)
RXD (2 ) 2
TXD (3 )
GND (5)
3
5
Top View
NOTE
1) Device S
The unit of PLC internal memory is byte and Device S is read by the unit of byte. Therefore, we
recommend the user do not use two consecutive devices S as the read addresses or the interference will
occur. For example, when choosing two numeric input device, please use S24 and S26, do not use S24
and S25.
1 ~ 6
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-23
Copley Servo (Stepnet Protocol) Back to Table
A. HMI factory setting
Baud rate: 9600, 8, None, 1.
PLC station number: 0.
Control area/status area: None.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
RAM memory Rn n: 00-FF (Hex) N/A DWord
Flash memory Fn n: 00-FF (Hex) N/A DWord
Internal Register IRn n: 0-31 N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
BIT_DEVICE_RB RBn.b n: 00-FF (Hex) b: 0-31
BIT_DEVICE_FB FBn.b n: 00-FF (Hex) b: 0-31
BIT_DEVICE_T0 T0n N/A n: 0
BIT_DEVICE_T1 T1n N/A n: 0
BIT_DEVICE_T2 T2n N/A n: 0
BIT_DEVICE_RST RSTn N/A n: 0
BIT_DEVICE_CPR CPRn n: 00-FF (Hex) N/A
BIT_DEVICE_CPF CPFn n: 00-FF (Hex) N/A
NOTE
1) RB and FB are the bit access of Ram/Flash memory. Therefore, RB0x21.14 indicates bit 14 of Ram
memory 0x21.
2) T0, T1 and T2 is virtual device for simulating Trajectory Generator Command. The number of 0, 1 and 2
indicates the subcommand of that command, so only bit 0 is acceptable.
3) RST is for simulating Reset Command, so only bit 0 is acceptable.
4) CPR and CPF are for simulating Copy Command of Ram and Flash individually. The address (n) after
CPR and CPF is just the copy address for Ram/Flash memory. For example, CPRCA indicates that the
content of Ram memory 0xCA will be copied into Flash memory 0xCA and CPFA6 indicates that the
content of Flash memory 0xA6 will be copied into Ram memory 0xA6.
5) T0, T1, T2, RST, CPR, CPF are all write-only and they can not be used on Reset button.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-24 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)
RXD (2 ) RS-232 TxD
TXD (3 )
GND (5)
RS-232 RxD
Signal Ground
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-25
Danfoss VLT 2800 (FC Protocol) Back to Table
A. HMI factory setting
Baud rate: 9600, 8, Even, 1, RS-485.
PLC station number: 1.
Control area/status area: None / None.
NOTE
1) Delta HMI can be connected to for VLT-2800, 5000, 6000, 7000 controllers.
2) Each data length format of Danfoss AC drive parameter is not fixed, therefore, “Multiple Duplicate”
function is not provided.
3) Max. supported alarm number is 16. If the alarm number is over 16, a fault will occur.
4) Does not support “optimum read/write” characteristic.
5) If the selected element is a string, the minimum data length should be more than 2.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range
Bit No.
Low Byte High Byte Register Type Format
Word No.
Index No.
Parameter Pn:I n: 0 ~ 999 0 I: 0 ~ 31
Control Word CTRWD 0 N/A N/A
Status Word STAWD 0 N/A N/A
Index No : If the index No. is not used, its default setting will be 0. The default setting of index No. for
parameter P606 ~ P617 is 1.
Please notice that it is necessary to input the index No. when using some parameters of Danfoss
controllers. At this time, please pay close attention on the setting range of index number. If the setting
range is not started from 0, the parameter read & write failure will occur. For example, the index No.
setting range of the parameter P615 is from 1 to 20, if the users do not input the index No., the system
will assume the index number is 0 (default setting) and the a fault will occur when the users read or write
the parameter.
CTRWD: Write-only. (Can not be used on the devices which can display the value or input value. It is
recommended to be used on the setting value/setting constant (button), or marco function.)
STAWD: Read-only.
Control & Status Word: Please refer to the explanation on the next page.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-26 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Contacts
Read/Write Range
Word No. Bit No.
Low Byte High Byte Contact Type Format
Element No.Bits Index No.
Parameter Pn:I.b n: 0 ~ 999 b: 0 ~ 31 I: 0 ~ 31
Bit No : Low byte stores Bit address. High byte stores index number.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-485
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller RS-485 cable connector
RXD+ (2) 68 TXD/RXD+
TXD+ (3 )
RXD- (1 )
TXD- (4)
Shell Shell
69 TXD/RXD-
Explanation of Control Word & Status Word
Control Word
Bit Bit = 0 Bit = 1
15 No Function Reversing
14 Choice of Setup 2 (msb)
13 Choice of Setup 1 (lsb)
12 No Function Relay 04 activated
11 No Function Relay 01 activated
10 Data Not Vaild Vaild
9 Ramp 1 Ramp2
8 Jog 1 OFF ON
7 No Function Reset
6 Ramp Stop Start
5 Hold Ramp Enable
4 Quick-Stop Ramp
3 Coasting Enable
2 DC Brake Ramp
1 Preset reference choice msb
0 Preset reference choice msb
When Bit 10 = 1 (Data Valid), the Control Word is valid.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-27
Status Word
Bit Bit = 0 Bit = 1
15 Timer OK Above limit
14 Torque OK Above limit
13 Voltage OK Above limit
12 Temperature OK Over-Temp, auto-start pending
11 Not Running Running
10 Out of Range Frequency OK
9 Local Control Bus Control
8 Speed ≠ reference Speed = reference
7 No Warning Warning
6 Reserved
5 Reserved
4 Reserved
3 No Fault Trip
2 Coasting Enabled
1 VLT not ready Ready
0 Control not ready Ready
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-28 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Emerson EC20 Series PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory setting
Baud rate: 19200, 8, Even, 1 (RS-232).
PLC station number: 0.
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
Data Word Dn n: 0-7999 N/A Word
Special Data Word SDn n: 0-255 N/A Word
Data Word Zn n: 0-15 N/A Word
Timer Tn n: 0-255 N/A Word
Counter Cn n: 0-199 N/A Word
DoubleWord Counter CDWn n: 200-255 N/A DWord
DoubleWord Data Word DDWn n: 0-7998 N/A DWord
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
External Output Relay Yb N/A b: 0-377(Octal)
External Input Relay Xb N/A b: 0-377(Octal)
Internal Relay Mb N/A b: 0-1999
Special Internal Relay SMb N/A b: 0-255
Status Relay Sb N/A b: 0-991
Timer Tb N/A b: 0-255
Counter Cb N/A b: 0-255
NOTE
PLC Communication Settings:
1) Emerson EC20 series PLC has two communication ports, COM0 and COM1. They are provided for the
communication protocol for connecting to PC, Modbus communication protocol and user-defined
protocol. The default setting is COM0 to be enabled only, so the user needs to set the communication
mode as Modbus RTU via PC software before using it.
2) COM1 supports RS-232 and RS-485.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-29
3) Please note that not all of the addresses can be written when reading SM and SD device. We
recommend the user not to set all of the addresses as write address except when setting parameters.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller COM1
RXD (2 ) TXD
TXD (3 )
GND (5)
RXD
GND
RS-485
DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller COM1
D- (1)(3) RS485+
D- (4)
D+ (2)(4) RS485-
D+ (3)
G ND (5) GND
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-30 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Facon FB Series PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, Even, 1.
Controller Station number: 1.
Control area/status area: R0 / R10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Input Relay WXn n: 0 ~ 9992 N/A Byte
Output Relay WYn n: 0 ~ 9992 N/A Byte
Internal Relay WMn n: 0 ~ 9992 N/A Byte
Step Relay WSn n: 0 ~ 9992 N/A Byte
Data Register Rn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A Word
Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A Word
Timer Present Value RTn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word
Counter Present Value RCn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word
Data Register DRCn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word
Input Relay / Output Relay / Internal Relay / Special Relay: Address must be the multiple of 8.
Contacts
Read/Write range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999
Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999
Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999
Step Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999
Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999
Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-31
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 15 pin male (RS-232)
Controller 15 pin male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(1) RXD
(6) SG
(3) RTS
(4) CTS
Top View
RS-232
Connecting to CB (Communication Board) or CM (Communication Module)
FBs Series Port 1
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RXD
(5) GND
(8) RTS
(7) CTS
RS-232
FBs Series Port 0
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 4 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
Controller 4 pin Mini DIN male
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (4) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(1) GND
(3) +5V
Pin1
Pin1
1 2
3 4
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-32 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Festo PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, None, 1.
Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol)
Control area/status area: R0 / R10.
NOTE
1) Connectable PLC: FEC-FC Model
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size
WORD_DEVICE_IW Iwn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_OW Own n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_FW FWn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_TW TWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_CW CWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_R Rn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_TP TPn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_CP CPn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
Contacts
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No.
BIT_DEVICE_I In.b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15
BIT_DEVICE_O On.b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15
BIT_DEVICE_F Fn.b n: 0 ~ 9999 b: 0 ~ 15
BIT_DEVICE_T Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
BIT_DEVICE_C Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
BIT_DEVICE_TON TONn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
BIT_DEVICE_TOFF TOFFn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
BIT_DEVICE_T / BIT_DEVICE_C / BIT_DEVICE_TON / BIT_DEVICE_TOFF: Only 1 Bit can be
transferred for each communication.
Only 1 Bit or 1 Word can be transferred for each write command.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-33
C. Connections
NOTE
1) Communication port of PLC: COM port
2) It needs to use the dedicated cable for FESTO controllers Cable for transferring TTL to RS-232 and it
is 6 pin RJ-12 connector at PLC side.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-34 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
GE Fanuc 90 Series SNP PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 19200, 8, ODD, 1.
Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: %R1 / %R10.
NOTE
1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication
is allowed.
2) If the PLC enabled “Check Password” function, the user needs to set the password by clicking Option >
Configuration > Communication. The user can find Controller Settings and set PLC password on
Communication Tab in the Configuration dialog box. Please enter a 4-digit password (If entering a
password that exceeds 4-digit number, only the first 4-digit number is valid).
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Discrete Inputs %In n: 1 ~ 12288 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
Discrete Outputs %Qn n: 1 ~ 12288 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
Discrete Temporaries %Tn n: 1 ~ 256 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
Discrete Internals %Mn n: 1 ~ 12288 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
%SA Discretes %SAn n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
%SB Discretes %SBn n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
%SC Discretes %SCn n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
%S Discretes %S-n n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
Genius Global Data %Gn n: 1 ~ 7680 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)
Registers %Rn n: 1 ~ 16384 N/A Word
Analog Inputs %AIn n: 1 ~ 8192 N/A Word
Analog Outputs %AQn n: 1 ~ 8192 N/A Word
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-35
Contacts
Read/Write range Contact Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Discrete Inputs %In N/A n: 1 ~ 12288
Discrete Outputs %Qn N/A n: 1 ~ 12288
Discrete Temporaries %Tn N/A n: 1 ~ 256
Discrete Internals %Mn N/A n: 1 ~ 12288
%SA Discretes %SAn N/A n: 1 ~ 128
%SB Discretes %SBn N/A n: 1 ~ 128
%SC Discretes %SCn N/A n: 1 ~ 128
%S Discretes %-Sn N/A n: 1 ~ 128
Genius Global Data %Gn N/A n: 1 ~ 7680
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
Controller RJ-45 cable connector
(RS-232)
Controller RJ-45 cable connector
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (5) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(6) RXD
(4) GND Top View81
RS-422
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 15 pin male (RS-232)
Controller 15 pin male (RS-232)
RXD+ (2) (13) SD(B')
TXD+ (3)
TXD- (4)
(11) RD(B)
(10 ) RD(A)
(6) RTS(A)
(15 ) CTS(A')
RXD- (1) (12 ) SD(A')
(8) CTS(B)
(14 ) RTS(B')
(9) RD( *)(NOT E 1 )
Top View
NOTE
1) (9) RD(*) should be connected to 10(RD)(A) in serial. But if connecting PLC model is Series 90-70 PLC
IC697CPU731 and IC697CPU771, (9) RD(*) needs to be connected to 11(RD)(B).
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-36 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Hitachi EH Series PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 19200, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: WR0 / WR10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
External Input WX WXrusn Word
External Output WY WYrusn s: 0-A n: 0-7
r: 0-4 u: 0-4 N/A
Word
Internal Output WR WRn n: 0-C3FF N/A Word
Special Internal Output WR WRn n: F000-F1FF N/A Word
Shared Internal Output WM WMn n: 0-3FF N/A Word
CPU Link Area 1 WL WLn n: 0-3FF N/A Word
CPU Link Area 2 WL WLn n: 1000-13FF N/A Word
Timer/Counter TC TCn n: 0-511 N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
External Input X Xrusb
External Output Y Yrusb s: 0-A N/A
r: 0-4 u: 0-4 b: 0-95
Internal Output R Rb N/A b: 0-7FF
Shared Internal Output M Mnb n: 0-3FF b: 0-F
CPU Link Area 1 L Lnb n: 0-3FF b: 0-F
CPU Link Area 2 L Lnb n: 1000-13FF b: 0-F
On Delay Timer TD TDb N/A b: 0-255
Single-shot Timer SS SSb N/A b: 0-255
Up Counter CU CUb N/A b: 0-511
Up-down Counter up input CTU CTUb N/A b: 0-511
Up-down Counter down input CTD CTDb N/A b: 0-511
Up-down Counter down output CT CTb N/A b: 0-511
Progress Value Clear CL CLb N/A b: 0-511
Rising Edge Detection DIF DIFb N/A b: 0-511
Falling Edge Detection DFN DFNb N/A b: 0-511
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-37
NOTE
1) Communication Settings:
In Hitachi EH series PLC, only port 1 can be used for communication through procedure 2. The
user can select procedure type via DIP switch and specific Special Internal Input (WR).
In Hitachi EH-150 series PLC, only EH-CPU***A/448/516/548 can use procedure 2.
It needs to set the external I/O (WX, WY, X, Y) of EH series PLC first or HMI cannot read and write
their addresses.
Hitachi EH series PLC and PC can be connected only by procedure 1 (@19200bps)
2) CPU Relevant Notice:
EH-150
DIP5 should be set to ON.
If DIP5 is set to ON, PLC will determine the proper procedure (1 or 2) by the value of WRf037.
When setting the address, the highest bit of write value must be 1 and then PLC can write the value
into other seven bits. The data will not lost even when the power of PLC is cut off. Therefore,
i) Write the value 0x8000 into the address. After restart PLC, the address value will become
0x0000 and perform communication by procedure 1.
ii) Write the value 0xC000 into the address. After restart PLC, the address value will become
0x4000 and perform communication by procedure 2.
Use DIP3 and DIP4 to set the communication speed of port 1.
i) When DIP3 is ON and DIP4 is OFF, the communication speed is 19200bps.
Use DIP6, PHL to set the communication speed of port 2.
i) When DIP6 is ON and PHL is OFF, the communication speed is 19200bps.
ii) The EH-150 PLC is a “Base Unit” which has a built-in CPU module. This unit allows easy
connection of extension module, such as “External I/O”.
MicroEH
DIP5 is used to set communication speed.
i) When SW1 is ON, the communication speed is 19200bps.
MicroEH PLC will determine the proper procedure (1 or 2) by the value of WRf01a. Different than
EH-150, when setting the address, the highest bit of write value does not need to be 1. But the data
will lost even the power of PLC is cut off. However, if set the value of R7f6 to 1, the data of WRf01a
will be saved into Flash memory.
i) 0x0000 for procedure 1.
ii) 0x8000 for procedure 2.
iii) If the PLC uses procedure 2 and saves the data into Flash memory, it cannot connect to
the peripheral devices and programs (Ladder Editor) that only support procedure 1.
iv) Standard External I/O built in MicroEH PLC are listed as below:
Digital Type
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-38 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
slot 0: X48
slot 1: Y32
slot 2: empty16
Analog Type
slot 3: X4W
slot 4: Y4W
3) Communication Protocol:
External I/O (X, Y, WX, WY)
Address rules:[r][u][s][n/b].
i) Word no/Bit no [n/b]
ii) Slot number [s]
iii) Unit number [u]
iv) Remote number [r]
Only support EH-150
v) ex1: WX103 represents unit 1, word 3 of slot 0
vi) ex2: X103 represents bit 3 of slot 1
vii) ex3: X113 represents bit 13 of slot 1
viii) ex4: Y2004 represents unit 2, bit 4 of slot 0
ix) ex5: Y2104 represents unit 2, bit 4 of slot 1
External I/O (X, Y, WX, WY) cannot read and write several addresses one time so they do not
support “optimum read/write” characteristic.
Internal Output
Shared Internal Output (M, WM) read and write the same address. For example,
i) M3ab and WM3a: the read and write address of M3ab is the bit b of WM3a.
CPU Link Area (L, WL) are the same as Shared Internal Output (M, WM). CPU Link Area (L, WL)
also read and write the same address.
i) Only support EH-150.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (5) SD1
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(6) RD1
(1) SG1
RTS (7) (7) DR1
CT S (8 ) (8 ) RS1
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-39
HUST CNC Controller Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 2.
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: W0 / W10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
Word Register Wn n: 0 ~ 13500 N/A Word
Double Word Register Dn n: 0 ~ 13500 N/A Double Word
NOTE
1) The unit for Hust CNC controller is D Word and Wn is the low word of Dn.
Contacts
Read/Write range Contact Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
BIT_DEVICE_B Bm.n m: 0 ~ 13500 n: 0 ~ 31
BIT_DEVICE_I In N/A n: 0 ~ 255 (8 DW)
BIT_DEVICE_O On N/A n: 0 ~ 255 (8 DW)
BIT_DEVICE_C Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255 (8 DW)
BIT_DEVICE_S Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 255 (8 DW)
BIT_DEVICE_A An N/A n: 0 ~ 1023 (32 DW)
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RXD
(5) SG
(8) RTS
(7) CTS
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-40 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Jetter Nano Series PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1 (RS-232).
Controller station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: WR0 / WR10.
NOTE
1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication
is allowed.
2) Only 1 Bit or 1 Word can be transferred for each communication.
3) In general, each register occupies max. 24 Bits. However, some registers occupies 8 Bits only.
4) Because the initial time of this controller is longer, it is recommended to set HMI startup delay time
(Recommended time is 10 seconds).
5) When the register R is used for Double Word device, please set its format as signed format. (The default
format in Screen Editor is signed format)
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data
Length
16 Bits Register WRn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A 16 Bits
32 Bits Register Rn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A 24 Bits
Only the first 16 bits are used for WRn registers.
Only the first 24 bits are used for Rn registers, the highest 8 bits (Bit 24 ~ 31) are set to 0 by default setting.
(24-bit Integer : If in decimal format, the range is -8388608 ~ +8388607. If in hexadecimal format, the range
is 0x000000 ~ 0xFFFFFF.)
NOTE
1) The difference between WRn and Rn:
When using devices that the data length is in Word, only Bit 0 ~ 15 are valid for both of WRn and
Rn registers.
When using devices that the data length is in Double Word,
if the read/write address format is set to WRn, the Bit 0 ~ 15 of WRn register is the low word of a
read/write value, the Bit 0 ~ 15 of WRn+1 register is the high word of a read/write value.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-41
if the read/write address format is set to Rn, only Bit 0 ~ 23 are valid for Rn registers.
(Notice: As the Jetter controller is a 24-bit format controller, the valid setting range is 24 Bits.
If exceeds this range, HMI will stop read/write operation and show “…..Value is Incorrect”
on the screen. So, please do not set any bit on Bit24 ~ Bit31 (Bit24 ~ Bit31 cannot be written).
When using devices that the data length is in m Words,
if the read/write address format is set to WRn, the Bit 0 ~ 15 of WRn register is the lowest word of a
read/write value and the Bit 0 ~ 15 of WRn+m-1 register is the highest word of a read/write value.
if the read/write address format is set to Rn, the Bit 0 ~ 23 of Rn register is the lowest word of a
read/write value and the Bit 0 ~ 23 of Rn+1 register is the highest word of a read/write value.
Each register is regards as a “Double Word”. The value of Bit24 ~ Bit31 is 0.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Relay Inbb n: 1 ~ 32 bb: 01 ~ 08
Output Relay Onbb n: 1 ~ 32 bb: 01 ~ 08
Flag Relay Fn N/A n: 0 ~ 32767
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RXD
(7) GND
Top View
The pin definition of the cable of Jetter controller is different than the general RS-232 cable. Please pay
close attention.
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-42 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Jetter JC Series PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1 (RS-232).
Controller station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: WR0 / WR10.
NOTE
1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication
is allowed.
2) Only 1 Bit or 1 Word / 2 Words can be transferred for each read and write command.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data
Length
16 Bits Register WRn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A 16 Bits
32 Bits Register Rn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A 24 Bits
The characteristics of WRn and Rn of JC series are the same as the Nano series. Please refer to the section
that introduces Jetter Nano Series PLC.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Relay Inbb n: 1 ~ 32 bb: 01 ~ 16
Output Relay Onbb n: 1 ~ 32 bb: 01 ~ 16
Flag Relay Fn N/A n: 0 ~ 32767
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-43
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (8) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(4) RXD
(2) GND
Top View
2 4
8
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-44 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Keyence KV/KZ Series Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1 (RS-232).
Controller station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: DM-0 / DM-10.
NOTE
1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication
is allowed.
2) Only 1 Bit or 1 Word can be transferred for each communication. (Communication speed is slow.)
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
Timer T-nnn nnn: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
Counter C-nnn nnn: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
High-speed Counter CTH-n n: 0 ~ 1 N/A Word
High-speed Counter Comparator CTC-n n: 0 ~ 3 N/A Word
Data Memory DM-nnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 1999 N/A Word
Temporary Data Memory TM-nn nn: 0 ~ 31 N/A Word
Timer Preset Value PT-nnn nnn: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
Counter Preset Value PC-nnn nnn: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
CTC Preset Value PCTC-n n: 0 ~ 3 N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Relay R-nnnbb nnn: 0 ~ 69 bb: 00 ~ 15
Timer T-nnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 199
Counter C-nnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 199
High-speed counter comparator
CTC-n N/A n: 0 ~ 3
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-45
NOTE
When using the protocol format of KV series and connecting to KZ-80T PLC, some errors occur. Please refer
to the following description:
1) Readable Timer address is not continuous. For example, T-0 ~ T-9 can be read, T10 cannot be read,
T11 ~ T20 can be read, T21 ~ T50 cannot be read, …etc.
2) Counter cannot be read. For example,
Registers: C- (Counter), CTH- (High-speed counter), CTC- (High-speed counter comparator),
PC- (Counter preset value), PCTC- (CTC preset value) they all cannot be read.
Contacts: C- (Counter), CTC- (High-speed counter comparator) they all cannot be read also.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
KV Series
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)
RXD (2) (3) SD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(5) RD
(4) SG
Top View6 - 1
PLC side (Comm. Port)
KZ Series
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)
RXD (2) (5) SD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RD
(4) SG
Top View6 - 1
PLC side (Comm. Port)
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-46 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
NOTE
1) Communication Cable: The pins of SD and RD of KZ-80T and KV Series are reverse.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-47
Koyo SU/DL Series Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1 (RS-232).
Controller station number: 1.
Control area/status area: V1400 / V1410.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data
Length
Timer Accumulated Vn n: 0 ~ 177 (octal) N/A Word
Counter Accumulated Vn n: 1000 ~ 1177 (octal) N/A Word
V Memory Vn n: 1400 ~ 7777 (octal) N/A Word
Linker Relays Vn n: 40000 ~ 40037 (octal) N/A Word
Input Status Vn n: 40400 ~ 40423 (octal) N/A Word
Output Status Vn n: 40500 ~ 40523 (octal) N/A Word
Control Relays Vn n: 40600 ~ 40635 (octal) N/A Word
Stage Vn n: 41000 ~ 41027 (octal) N/A Word
Timer Status Vn n: 41100 ~ 41107 (octal) N/A Word
Counter Status Vn n: 41140 ~ 41147 (octal) N/A Word
Spec. Relay 1 Vn n: 41200 ~ 41205 (octal) N/A Word
Spec. Relay 2 Vn n: 41216 ~ 41230 (octal) N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Linker Relays GXn N/A n: 0 ~ 777 (octal)
Input Status Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 477 (octal)
Output Status Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 477 (octal)
Control Relays Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 737 (octal)
Stage Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 577 (octal)
Timer Status Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 177 (octal)
Counter Status CTn N/A n: 0 ~ 177 (octal)
Spec. Relay 1 SPn N/A n: 0 ~ 137 (octal)
Spec. Relay 2 SPn N/A n: 320 ~ 617 (octal)
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-48 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector
(RS-232)
RXD(2)
TXD(3)
GND(5)
(4)TXD
(3)RXD
(1)GND
(6)GND
Top View1 - 6
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-49
Koyo K-Sequence Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1 (RS-232).
Controller station number: 1.
Control area/status area: R1400 / R1420.
NOTE
1) If read / write address exceeds the valid range, HMI will stop read/write operation and show “….Error
6….. Command Can Not be Executed….” on the screen.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data
Length
Input Status Xnnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 1760 (octal) N/A Word
Output Status Ynnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 1760 (octal) N/A Word
Link Relays GXnnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 3760 (octal) N/A Word
Relays GQnnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 3760 (octal) N/A Word
Relays Mnnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 3760 (octal) N/A Word
Stage Snnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 1760 (octal) N/A Word
Timer Status Tnnn nnn: 0 ~ 360 (octal) N/A Word
Control Relays Cnnn nnn: 0 ~ 360 (octal) N/A Word
Special Relay 1 SPnnn nnn: 0 ~ 760 (octal) N/A Word
Register Rnnnnn nnnnn: 0 ~ 41237 (octal) N/A Word
Register Pnnnnn nnnnn: 0 ~ 37777 (octal) N/A Word
nnnn: Is in octal format and must be the multiple of 16 except for R and P.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Status Xnnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 1777 (octal)
Output Status Ynnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 1777 (octal)
Linker Relays GXnnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 3777 (octal)
Relays GQnnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 3777 (octal)
Control Relays Mnnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 3777 (octal)
Stage Snnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 1777 (octal)
Timer Status Tnnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 377 (octal)
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-50 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Counter Status Cnnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 377 (octal)
Spec. Relay 1 SPnnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 777 (octal)
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
Port 0 Communication Cable
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)
Controller RJ-11 cable connector
(RS-232)
RXD(2)
TXD(3)
GND(5)
(4 )TXD
(3 )RXD
(1 )GND
(6 )GND (Note 1)
Top View1 - 6
If pin 6 is not grounded, a communication error may occur when connecting to a CKD SM 24R controller.
Ensure that pin 6 is well grounded. This will not cause any problems when connecting to SN32DRA
controller.
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) SG
Top View
RS-485
Port 1 Communication Cable
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
D- (1) D-
D+ (2)
D+ (3)
D+
D- (4)
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-51
The corresponding registers of CCM2 and K-Sequence
Address Corresponding Relationship:
CCM2 K sequence SN32DRA V R R X X I Y Y Q C M M S S S T T T
CT C C SP SP SP
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-52 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Lenze LECOM-A/B Protocol Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1 (Baudrate: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200).
Controller station number: 1 (1~99).
Control area/status area: None / None.
NOTE
1) Please pay close attention to each pin definition of cable connectors.
2) Ensure not to use the general RS-232 5-pin cable. This is because if pin 2, 3, 5, 7, 8 are all connected to
the drive, the drive can not recognize the communication signal and can not identify what kind of
communication it is.
3) For more detailed information of pin definition of cable connectors, please refer to the C. Connections
(Connector Pinouts) of Lenze LECOM-A/B Protocol controller.
4) Ensure the HMI communication data format (The communication data written into the drive) is correct.
The Word “m” in the following table is used to specify the HMI communication data format.
5) Ensure the HMI display data format (Property table/Setting value...etc.) is correct.
6) When using broadcast function, please check if device is available. This is because the broadcast
function can be activated only when the user chooses “write only” device for broadcast station number
(only choose setting value/setting constant (button) and then the broadcast function can be used). If
choosing other devices, the system will ask you to read back the drive setting value, so please ensure to
choose the correct device. If choosing the incorrect devices, a “Controller Station Number Error…” fault
message will display on HMI screen.
7) Support 82XX frequency inverters and 93XX servo inverters.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers (n, m, y are in decimal)
Read/Write Range
Word No. Bit No.
LowByte HighByte Register Type Format
subcode
Data Length
CWn n: 1 ~ 10000 N/A N/A Word Parameter without subcode
CWn.m n: 1 ~ 10000 m: 0 ~ 23 N/A Word
Parameter with subcode CWn/y n: 1 ~ 10000 N/A y:1 ~ 255 Word
CWn/y.m n: 1 ~ 10000 m: 0 ~ 23 y:1 ~ 255 Word
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-53
Read/Write Range
Word No. Bit No.
LowByte HighByte Register Type Format
subcode
Data Length
CDn n: 1 ~ 10000 N/A N/A DoubleWord Parameter without subcode
CDn.m n: 1 ~ 10000 m: 0 ~ 23 N/A DoubleWord
Parameter with subcode CDn/y n: 1 ~ 10000 N/A y:1 ~ 255 DoubleWord
CDn/y.m n: 1 ~ 10000 m: 0 ~ 23 y:1 ~ 255 DoubleWord
NOTE
1) m : HMI communication data format
2) The value of m represents the different communication data format:
If m value is undefined: ASCII hexadecimal format (VH). (4 or 8 numbers.)
m >= 23 : ASCII hexadecimal format (VH). (4 or 8 numbers.)
m = 0 ~10 : unsigned, ASCII decimal format (VD).
m represents decimal place, For example:
m=0 no decimal place
m=1 one decimal place (tenth)
m=2 two decimal place (hundredth)
m = 11 ~20 : signed, ASCII decimal format (VD).
m represents decimal place, For example:
m=11 one decimal place (tenth)
m=12 two decimal place (hundredth)
m = 21 : signed, ASCII decimal format (VD).
without decimal place
m = 22 : ASCII hexadecimal format (VH). 2 numbers.
when using this format, the write value will be limited within the range of 0~0xFF (low byte).
For example: when entering 0x1234 during communication, the actual write value is 0x34, not 0x1234.
Contacts (n, b, y are in decimal)
Read/Write Range
Word No. Bit No.
LowByte HighByte Register Type Format
subcode
Parameter without subcode CBn.b n: 1 ~ 10000 b: 0 ~ 31 N/A
Parameter with subcode CBn/y.b n: 1 ~ 10000 b: 0 ~ 31 1 ~ 255
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-54 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Only VH type parameter can provide Bit read/write function (it is convenient for the user to read/write Bit No.
of parameters).
CBn.b, CWn (CWn.m), CDn (CDn.m): read/write address is the same (address n).
NOTE
1) Since the data format of this controller is complicated (a. VS (String format), b. VO (Octet string format
data blocks), c. VH (ASCII hexadecimal format)(1, 2, 4 bytes), d. VD (ASCII decimal format)(positive,
negative, decimal,..)) and the communication format is not compatible, therefore, it is needed to ensure
the HMI communication data format is correct, or an error may occur.
2) Registers: only can read/write the data of ASCII hexadecimal format (VH), ASCII decimal format (VD)
(i.e. Either VH or VD data format can be set via communication.)
Contacts: only can read/write the data of ASCII hexadecimal format (VH)
HMI display data format (Property table/Setting value...etc.) should also be correct.
Explanation:
Registers: only can read/write the data of VH, VD. HMI needs to set communication data format
(please refer to 4), 5) and 6)). String format (VS), and Octet string format for data blocks (VO) can
not be used. If the controller returns the data in VS or VO format, HMI will show “……Value Is
Incorrect” on the screen.
Contacts: only can read/write the data of ASCII hexadecimal format (VH). Only VH type parameter
can provide Bit read/write function. If the controller returns the data in other format, HMI will show
“……Value Is Incorrect” on the screen.
Do not write the inexistent Bit address, or HMI will show “….Write …. Command Can Not be
Executed” on the screen.
For example: CW470/1. The valid value of CW470/1 is within the range of 0 ~ 0xFF. Therefore, Bit
8 ~31 is not existed. Although HMI will show the value of Bit 8 ~31 is 0, the user can not write or set
the value.
The settings of ASCII hexadecimal format (VH) and ASCII decimal format (VD) should be correct. If
the VD data is set in VH format in HMI (m value is undefined, or m=22 or 23) or the VH data is set
in VD format in HMI (m=0 ~ 21), when HMI write the data, HMI will show “….Write …. Command
Can Not be Executed” on the screen or tell the user the write value is incorrect.
The decimal place of ASCII decimal format (VD) should be set correctly, or the write value will not
be correct. The decimal place displayed on HMI should also be correct, or the display value will be
incorrect.
ASCII hexadecimal format (VH), 2 numbers (m = 22). The value is limited to 2 numbers. Using this
format the write value will be limited within the range of 0 ~ 0xFF (low byte) automatically.
3) Station Number and Broadcast
The valid station number is from 0 to 99. If exceeds this range, HMI will stop read/write operation
and show “Controller Station Number Error …”on the screen.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-55
00 indicates the global broadcasting number (1~99).
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 are local broadcasting number.
The affected ranges are: 11~19, 21~29, 31~39, 41~49, 51~59, 61~69, 71~79, 81~89 and 91~99
respectively. Only choose setting value/setting constant (button), and then the broadcast function
can be used. If choosing other devices, the system will be confused while reading back the drive
setting value via broadcast function, so please ensure to choose the correct device. If choosing the
incorrect devices, a “Controller Station Number Error…” fault message will display on HMI screen.
Use in LECOM-A/B protocol. 82XX frequency AC drives and 93XX servo drives all use this protocol.
4) Explanation of communication error address
Registers: display CW n, CWy n, CD n, CDy n in order
Contacts: display CB n, CByn in order (n: address value)
5) HMI data format explanation
Some controller parameters are in Word and some are in Double Word. Therefore, there are two
kinds of data format: Word ( CWn (CWn.m), CWn/y(CWn/y.m) ) and Double Word ( CDn (CDn.m),
CDn/y(CDn/y.m) ).
Furthermore, regarding to Bit No., HMI only read/write 32Bit (Bit0 ~ Bit31) of parameters in VH
format.
CWn(CWn.m), CDn(CDn.m), or CBn.b: read/write address is the same (address n), but
When symbol is set to CW, read/write value is the low word of parameters (n) only,
When symbol is set to CD, read/write value is the Double Word of whole parameters (n),
When symbol is set to CB, read/write value is the Bit (b) No. of parameters (n).
(m : HMI communication data format)
(CWn/y(CWn/y.m), CDn/y(CDn/y.m), CBn/y.b: read/write address, which y subcode is the
same(address n), but
When symbol is set to CW, read/write value is the low word of parameters (n) only,
When symbol is set to CD, read/write value is the Double Word of whole parameters (n),
When symbol is set to CB, read/write value is the Bit (b) No. of parameters (n).
(m : HMI communication data format)
Actually when using HMI,
i) When using devices that the unit is in Word (e.g. numeric devices (numeric value display,
numeric value input…)…), the read/write value will be the same no matter the read/write
address format is set to CWn or CDn as read/write value is the low word of parameters (n)
only.
ii) When using devices that the unit is in Double Word (e.g. numeric devices (numeric value
display, numeric value input…)…), if the read/write address format is set to CWn,
read/write value is coming from the low word of CWn and CWn+1 these two addresses.
(The low word of CWn is regarded as “low word” and the low word of CWn+1 is regarded
as “high word”, and then combining “low word” and “high word” to a Double Word.)
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-56 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
If the read/write address format is set to CDn, read/write value is the whole Double Word
of CDn (1 address).
iii) When using character device (e.g. character display, character input…), if the read/write
address format is set to CWn, the read/write value is coming from the low word of CWn,
CWn+1, CWn+2, …every address.
If the read/write address format is set to CDn, read/write value is the whole Double Word
of CDn, CDn+1, CDn+2,…every address.
iv) When using “Multiple Duplicate” function, if the Word and Bit addresses exceed the valid
range, the Word and Bit addresses will be set to 0 automatically. Sometime error will
occur to remind the user when compiling.
v) CBn.b, CBn/y.b are added for the user to read and write Bit No. of parameters in VH
format more easily.
vi) Only can read or write 1 parameter for each communication.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
Pin 2, 3, 5 are for RS-232 communication. Pin 7, 8 are for RS-485 communication.
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) GND
Top View
RS-485
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-485)
D- (1) (7) T/R (A)
D+ (2)
D+ (3)
(8) T/R (B)
D- (4)
Top View
Pin1
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-57
LG Master K120S/200S Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1. (RS-232)
Controller station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: DW0 / DW10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size
WORD_DEVICE_PW PWn n: 0 ~ 15 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_MW MWn n: 0 ~ 191 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_KW KWn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_LW LWn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_FW FWn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_TW TWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_CW CWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_DW DWn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word
Contacts
Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.
BIT_DEVICE_P Pnb n: 0 ~ 15 b: 0 ~ f
BIT_DEVICE_M Mnb n: 0 ~ 191 b: 0 ~ f
BIT_DEVICE_K Knb n: 0 ~ 31 b: 0 ~ f
BIT_DEVICE_L Lnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 0 ~ f
BIT_DEVICE_F Fnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 0 ~ f
BIT_DEVICE_T Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
BIT_DEVICE_C Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-58 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232 for LG K120S/200S)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male(RS-232 for LG K120S/200S)
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) GND
Top View
NOTE
1) If connecting to Pin 4 (RXD), Pin 7 (TXD) and Pin5 (SG), it indicates that CNet protocol is used (Please
refer to the section “LG Master-K CNET”. 120S/200S protocol and CNet protocol cannot be used
simultaneously. The users only can select either 120S/200S protocol or CNet protocol.
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-59
LG Glofa GM6 CNET Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 19200, 8, None, 1. (RS-232)
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: %MW0 / %MW10.
NOTE
1) HMI default setting is predefined for CPU Port. If the user want to connect to CNET communication
module, the baud rate should be changed to 38400, 8, None, 1. (RS-422 / RS-485).
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size
Input Image IWb.s.w w(word):0 ~ 3 s(slot): 0 ~ 7
b(base): 0 ~ 1 Word
Input Image IDb.s.w w(word):0 ~ 1 s(slot): 0 ~ 7
b(base): 0 ~ 1 DWord
Output Image QWb.s.w w(word):0 ~ 3 s(slot): 0 ~ 7
b(base): 0 ~ 1 Word
Output Image QDb.s.w w(word):0 ~ 1 s(slot): 0 ~ 7
b(base): 0 ~ 1 DWord
Internal Memory MWn n: 0 ~ 4095 N/A Word
Internal Memory MDn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A DWord
Contacts
Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.
Input Image IXb.s.n s(slot): 0 ~ 7 n(bit): 0 ~ 63 b(base): 0 ~ 1
Output Image QXb.s.n s(slot): 0 ~ 7 n(bit): 0 ~ 63 b(base): 0 ~ 1
Internal Memory MXn N/A n: 0 ~ 65535
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-60 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
via CPU Port
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (7) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(4) RXD
(5) GND
Top View
RS-422
via G6L-CUEC CNET communication module
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)
RXD+ (2) SDA
RXD- (1)
TXD- (4)
SDB
RDB
TXD+ (3) RDA
GND (5) SG
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-61
LG Master-K CNET Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1. (RS-422)
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: DW0 / DW10.
NOTE
1) HMI default setting is predefined for G6L-CUEC CNET communication module.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size
I/O Relay PWn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Word
Auxiliary Relay MWn n: 0 ~ 191 N/A Word
Keep Relay KWn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Word
Link Relay LWn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word
Special Relay FWn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word (Read Only)
Timer Elapsed Value TWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
Counter Elapsed Value CWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
Data Register DWn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word
Contacts
Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.
I/O Relay PXnb n: 0 ~ 31 b: 0 ~ F
Auxiliary Relay MXnb n: 0 ~ 191 b: 0 ~ F
Keep Relay KXnb n: 0 ~ 31 b: 0 ~ F
Link Relay LXnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 0 ~ F
Special Relay FXnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 0 ~ F
Timer Contact Relay TXb N/A b: 0 ~ 255
Counter Contact Relay CXb N/A b: 0 ~ 255
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-62 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-422
via G6L-CUEC CNET communication module
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)
RXD+ (2) SDA
RXD- (1)
TXD- (4)
SDB
RDB
TXD+ (3) RDA
GND (5) SG
RS-232
via LG-120S PLC (Master K)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (7) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(4) RXD
(5) GND
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-63
LG XGT CNET Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, None, 1.
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: DW0 / DW10.
NOTE
1) HMI default setting is predefined for XGL-CH2A CNET communication module.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size
I/O Relay PWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Auxiliary Relay MWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Keep Relay KWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Link Relay LWn n: 0 ~ 11263 N/A Word
Special Relay FWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (Read Only)
Timer Elapsed Value TWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Counter Elapsed Value CWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Data Register DWn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A Word
Contacts
Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.
I/O Relay PXnb n: 0 ~ 2047 b: 0 ~ F
Auxiliary Relay MXnb n: 0 ~ 2047 b: 0 ~ F
Keep Relay KXnb n: 0 ~ 2047 b: 0 ~ F
Link Relay LXnb n: 0 ~ 11263 b: 0 ~ F
Special Relay FXnb n: 0 ~ 2047 b: 0 ~ F
Timer Contact Relay TXb N/A b: 0 ~ 2047
Counter Contact Relay CXb N/A b: 0 ~ 2047
Data Relay DXn.b n: 0 ~ 32767 b: 0 ~ F
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-64 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-422
via XGL-CH2A CNET communication module (Channel 2)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)
RXD+ (2) TX+
RXD- ( 1)
TXD- (4)
TX-
RX-
TXD+ (3) RX+
G ND (5) SG
RS-232
via XGL-CH2A CNET communication module (Channel 1)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (3) TXD
T XD (3)
G ND (5)
(2 ) RXD
(5 ) GND
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-65
LIYAN LYPLC EX Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 3064 N/A Byte
Special Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 8000 ~ 8248 N/A Byte
Status Relay Sn n: 0 ~ 992 N/A Byte
Input Relay Xn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Byte
Output Relay Yn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Byte
Timer PV Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
16-bit Counter PV Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
32-bit Counter PV Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word
Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 7999 N/A Word
Special Data Register Dn n: 8000 ~ 8255 N/A Word
Auxiliary Relay / Special Auxiliary Relay / Status Relay / Input Relay / Output Relay: Address must be the
multiple of 8.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 3071
Special Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 8000 ~ 8255
Status Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 999
Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-66 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(7) RXD
(3) GND
(6) GND
Top View
2 3
6 7
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-67
M2i Master Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1.
Controller station number: 1.
Control area/status area: SB0 / SB10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Word Address SBn n: 0000 ~ FFFF N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Bit Address SBn.b n: 0000 ~ FFFF b: 0 ~ F
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-68 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
M2i Slave Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1.
Controller station number: 1 (no function)
Control area/status area: SB0 / SB10.
NOTE
1) HMI station number is Slave station number. (default setting is 0)
2) The relation between M2i communication address and HMI internal registers.
Modbus address Data definition in HMI
SB0000 ~ SB7FFF $0 ~ $32767
SB8000 ~ SB83FF $M0 ~ $M1023
SB8400 RCPNO
SB8500 ~ SBFFFF RCP0 ~ RCP31487
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size
Word Address SBn n: 0000 ~ FFFF N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Bit Address SBn.b n:0000 ~ FFFF b: 0 ~ F
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts):
Please refer to 1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication for detail.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-69
Matsushita FP PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.
Controller station number: 238.
Control area/status area: DT0 / DT10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Internal Relay WRn n: 0 ~ 886, N/A Word
Special Internal Relay 900 ~ 910
Link Relay WLn n: 0 ~ 639 N/A Word
External Input Relay WXn n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word
External Output Relay WYn n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word
Timer/Counter P.V. EVn n: 0 ~ 3071 N/A Word
Timer/Counter S.V. SVn n: 0 ~ 3071 N/A Word
Data Register DTn n: 0 ~ 32764 N/A Word
Link Data Register LDn n: 0 ~ 8447 N/A Word
File Register FLn n: 0 ~ 32764 N/A Word
Special Data Register DT9_n n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word
DT9_0 ~ DT9_511 are applicable for FP0 T32C, FP2, FP2SH, FP10SH controllers. (Special data
registers are all within the range of DT90000 ~ DT9XXXX).
The actual transmitted address of DT9_n is 90000 + n (for DT). For example, the actual transmitted
address of DT9_1 is 90001 (for DT), the actual transmitted address of DT9_2 is 90002 (for DT) and vise
versa.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Internal Relay Rnb n: 0 ~ 886 b: 0 ~ f
Special Internal Relay n: 900 ~ 910 b: 0 ~ f
Link Relay Lnb n: 0 ~ 639 b: 0 ~ f
External Input Relay Xnb n: 0 ~ 511 b: 0 ~ f
External Output Relay Ynb n: 0 ~ 511 b: 0 ~ f
Timer Flag Contact Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 3071
Counter Flag Contact Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 3071
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-70 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Increase the range of read / write address (for FP2SH / FP10SH controllers).
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
Controller 5 pin Mini DIN male
(RS-232 for FP0)
Controller 5 pin Mini DIN male
(RS-232 for FP0)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RXD
(1) SG
Top View
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232 for FP1)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232 for FP1)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RXD
(7) GND
(4) RTS
(5) CTS
Top View
1 2 3
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-71
Mirle FAMA SC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: 40100 / 40200.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word
Input Registers Wn n: 30001 ~ 40000 N/A Word
Input Registers is “read only”.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 10000
Discrete Inputs Bn N/A n: 10001 ~ 20000
Discrete Inputs is “read only”.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) SG
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-72 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Mitsubishi FX/FX2N PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
NOTE
1) If connecting to Mitsubishi FXxN series PLC, the user can use both FX2N and FX series communication
protocol.
2) If connecting to Mitsubishi FX series PLC, the user can only use FX series communication protocol.
3) Some registers of Mitsubishi PLCs are “read only”, however, when you write these “read only” registers,
PLCs will not report any communication error to HMI and this will cause HMI errors. Please be aware of
this when editing PLC program (this normally occurs when using FX series protocol when connecting to
a FXxN series PLC).
4) If connecting to Mitsubishi FXxN series PLC, it is recommended for the user to use FX2N protocol.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 3064 N/A Byte
Special Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 8000 ~ 8248 N/A Byte
Status Relay Sn n: 0 ~ 992 N/A Byte
Input Relay Xn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Byte
Output Relay Yn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Byte
Timer PV Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
16-bit Counter PV Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
32-bit Counter PV Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word
Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 7999 N/A Word
Special Data Register Dn n: 8000 ~ 8255 N/A Word
Auxiliary Relay/ Special Auxiliary Relay/ Status Relay/ Input Relay /Output Relay: Address must be the
multiple of 8.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-73
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 3071
Special Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 8000 ~ 8255
Status Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 999
Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-422
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 8pin Mini DIN male (RS-422)
Controller 8pin Mini DIN male
(RS-422)
RXD+ (2) (7) TXD+
RXD- (1)
TXD+ (3)
(4) TXD-
(2) RXD+
TXD- (4) (1) RXD-
GND (5) (3) SG
Top View
RS-422
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Pin 2 ( RXD+) Pi n3 SDB ( TXD+)
Pi n 1 ( RXD-)
Pin 4 ( TXD-)
Pi n16 SDA (TXD-)
Pin 15 RDA (RXD-)
Pin 3 ( TXD+) Pin 2 RDB (RXD+)
Pin 7 ( RTS+) Pin4 (CTS+)
Pi n 8 ( CTS+)
Pin 6 ( RTS-)
Pi n5 (RTS+)
Pin 17 (CT S-)
Pin 9 ( CTS-) Pin 18 (RTS-)
Pin 20
Pin 21
1 4 7
2
3
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-74 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Mitsubishi FX3U PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 7679 N/A Word
Special Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 8000 ~ 8511 N/A Word
Status Relay Sn n: 0 ~ 4095 N/A Word
Input Relay Xn n: 0 ~ 377(octal) N/A Word
Output Relay Yn n: 0 ~ 377(octal) N/A Word
Timer PV Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
16-bit Counter PV Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
32-bit Counter PV Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word
Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 7999 N/A Word
Special Data Register Dn n: 8000 ~ 8511 N/A Word
Auxiliary Relay/ Special Auxiliary Relay/ Status Relay/ Input Relay /Output Relay: Address must be the
multiple of 16.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 7679
Special Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 8000 ~ 8511
Status Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 4095
Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)
Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-75
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-422
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 8pin Mini DIN male (RS-422)
Controller 8pin Mini DIN male
(RS-422)
RXD+ (2) (7) TXD+
RXD- (1)
TXD+ (3)
(4) TXD-
(2) RXD+
TXD- (4) (1) RXD-
GND (5) (3) SG
Top View
1 4 7
2
3
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-76 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Mitsubishi A Series AJ71UC24 Communication Module Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.
Controller Station number: 0.
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
NOTE
1) This driver utilizes CheckSum.
2) Please set “PLC Mode” switch to position 5.
3) If OUTPUT Relay (Y) and Special Data Relay (SM) are set to 1, PLC will stop communication and the
communication will not recover automatically. PLC will need to be manually reset.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Input Xn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Output Yn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Link Relay Bn n: 0 ~ FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Internal Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Special Internal Relay SMn n: 9000 ~ 9255 N/A Word (9000 + multiple of 16)
Latch Relay Ln n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Annunciator Fn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Timer Value TNn n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word
Counter Value CNn n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word
Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word
Special Data Register SDn n: 9000 ~ 9255 N/A Word
File Register Rn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word
Link Register Wn n: 0 ~ FFF N/A Word
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-77
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF
Output Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF
Link Relay Bn N/A n: 0 ~ FFF
Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 8191
Special Internal Relay SMn N/A n: 9000 ~ 9255
Latch Relay Ln N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Annunciator Fn N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Timer Contact TSn N/A n: 0 ~ 999
Timer Coil TCn N/A n: 0 ~ 999
Counter Contact CSn N/A n: 0 ~ 999
Counter Coil CCn N/A n: 0 ~ 999
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-422
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)
RXD+ (2) SDA
RXD- (1)
TXD+ (3)
SDB
RDA
TXD- (4) RDB
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-78 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Mitsubishi A2A/A2AS/A2USH A1SH/A3N/A2ASH (CPU-S1) CPU Port Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.
Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
NOTE
1) This driver supports all Mitsubishi A series CPU port. Mitsubishi A series CPU port can be divided into
the following five categories according the used CPU code (used during communication):
A0J2…
A1N…
A1S ( / A2S / A2N …)
A3N ( / A1SH / A2SH …)
A2A ( / A2AS / A2USH …)
Delta HMI can support A2USH CPU port (same as A2A, A2AS CPU port.) and A1SH CPU port (same as
A3N, A2ASH CPU port.).
2) L and M: The communication address of L is the same as communication address of M.
3) PX and X:
In Mitsubishi A2A PLC, the communication address of PX and X are the same.
In other Mitsubishi A series PLCs, X is from odd address and PX is from even address. That is one place
where PX and X differ.
4) X, Y, B, M, SM, L, F, PX ----(Word),
X, Y, B, M, SM, L, F, PX ----(Bit),
When PLC station number is set to 255, only the value of even addresses will be read/written.
When PLC station number is set to other number (not 255), all value of all addresses will be read/written.
5) R address: R address will be different according to the size of File Register responded from PLC.
For example, A2USH: 1K: 3800 ~ 4000H
2K: 3000 ~ 4000H
3K: 2800 ~ 4000H
4K: 2000 ~ 4000H
5K: 4000 ~ 6800H(cy)
6K: 4000 ~ 7000H(cy)
File Register: PLC must be started correctly or the read / write value will be incorrect.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-79
6) Max. read/write registers & relays for communication once
128 Words (256 bytes) Registers
64 Words (128 bytes) Relays
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Input Xn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Output Yn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Link Relay Bn n: 0 ~ FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Internal Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Special Internal Relay SMn n: 9000 ~ 9255 N/A Word (9000 + multiple of 16)
Latch Relay Ln n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Annunciator Fn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Timer Value TNn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Counter Value CNn n: 0 ~ 1023 N/A Word
Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word
Special Data Register SDn n: 9000 ~ 9255 N/A Word
File Register Rn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word
Link Register Wn n: 0 ~ FFF N/A Word
Input Card Register PXn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF
Output Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF
Link Relay Bn N/A n: 0 ~ FFF
Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 8191
Special Internal Relay SMn N/A n: 9000 ~ 9255
Latch Relay Ln N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Annunciator Fn N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Timer Contact TSn N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Timer Coil TCn N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Counter Contact CSn N/A n: 0 ~ 1023
Counter Coil CCn N/A n: 0 ~ 1023
Input Card Register PXn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-80 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-422
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 25 pin D-SUB male(RS-422)
Pin 2 ( RXD+) Pi n3 SDB ( TXD+)
Pi n 1 ( RXD-)
Pin 4 ( TXD-)
Pi n16 SDA (TXD-)
Pin 15 RDA (RXD-)
Pin 3 ( TXD+) Pin 2 RDB (RXD+)
Pin 7 ( RTS+) Pin4 (CTS+)
Pi n 8 ( CTS+)
Pin 6 ( RTS-)
Pi n5 (RTS+)
Pin 17 (CT S-)
Pin 9 ( CTS-) Pin 18 (RTS-)
Pin 20
Pin 21
Explanation
How to set File Register (R) for Mitsubishi A serial PLC:
1. Startup MELSOFT series GX Developer.
2. Open “Project Data List” windows. (“View” Option)
3. Double click Parameter \ PLC Parameter, and open “Setting” window.
4. Set Memory Capacity \ File Register (0 ~8).
5. Press “End” button on the bottom and complete the setting.
6. Execute OnLine\Write to PLC.
7. Enable the “Parameter \ PLC/Network” and “File register \ Main” option (check the check box next to
“Parameter \ PLC/Network” and “File register \ Main”).
8. Press “Execute” button.
9. Complete
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-81
Mitsubishi Q Series CPU Port Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 19200, 8, ODD, 1.
Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: D-0 / D-10.
NOTE
1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication
is allowed.
2) If communication baud rate is not correct, HMI will set PLC baud rate as HMI baud rate automatically.
Therefore, do not worry if the baud rate is set incorrectly.
3) This driver support Mitsubishi Q00 and Q00J series with password protection models.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Input X-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Output Y-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Direct Input DX-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Direct Output DY-n n: 0 ~ 15 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Latch Relay L-n n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Annunciator F-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Edge Relay V-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Step Relay S-n n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Link Relay B-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Special Link Relay SB-n n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Internal Relay M-n n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Special Internal Relay SM-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Timer Value TN-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Retentive Timer Value SN-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Counter Value CN-n n: 0 ~ 1023 N/A Word
Data Register D-n n: 0 ~ 12287 N/A Word
Special Data Register SD-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word
Index Register Z-n n: 0 ~ 15 N/A Word
File Register R-n n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A Word
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-82 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
File Register ZR-n n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A Word
Link Register W-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word
Special Link Register SW-n n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word
Xn, Yn, DXn, Bn, SBn, Wn, SWn : n is in hexadecimal.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input X-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1FFF
Output Y-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1FFF
Direct input DX-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1FFF
Direct output DY-n N/A n: 0 ~ 15
Latch Relay L-n N/A n: 0 ~ 8191
Annunciator F-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Edge Relay V-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Step Relay S-n N/A n: 0 ~ 8191
Link Relay B-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1FFF
Special Link Relay SB-n N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF
Internal Relay M-n N/A n: 0 ~ 8191
Special Internal Relay SM-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Timer Contact TS-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Timer Coil TC-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Retentive timer Contact SS-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Retentive timer Coil SC-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047
Counter Contact CS-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1023
Counter Coil CC-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1023
Xn, Yn, DXn, Bn, SBn : n is in hexadecimal.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-83
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 6 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)
Controller 6 pin Mini DIN male
(RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) SD (TXD)
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(1) RD (RXD)
(3) GND
(5) DSR (DR)
(6) DTR (ER)
Top View
2
6 5 3
1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-84 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Mitsubishi Q Series Computer Link Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 19200, 8, None, 1.
Controller Station number: 0.
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
NOTE
1) This communication protocol supports Q series RS232 communication module (QJ71C24-R2) and
RS422 communication protocol (QJ71C24N).
2) Before using this communication protocol, the user needs to set communication module via PC software ,
GX Developer. For more detailed information regarding the setting method, please refer to Mitsubishi
User Manual named “User’s Manual (Basic) - Q Corresponding Series Communication Module”.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Input Xn n: 0-1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Output Yn n: 0-1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Internal Relay Mn n: 0-8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Special Internal Relay Mn n: 9000-9255 N/A Word (9000 + multiple of 16)
Link Relay Bn n: 0-1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Annunciator Fn n: 0-2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)
Timer Value TNn n: 0-2047 N/A Word
Counter Value CNn n: 0-2047 N/A Word
Data Register Dn n: 0-8191 N/A Word
Special Data Register Dn n: 9000-9255 N/A Word
Link Register Wn n: 0-1FFF N/A Word
Xn, Yn, Bn, Wn : n is in hexadecimal.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Xn N/A n: 0-1FFF
Output Yn N/A n: 0-1FFF
Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 0-8191
Special Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 9000-9255
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-85
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Link Relay Bn N/A n: 0-1FFF
Annunciator Fn N/A n: 0-2047
Timer Contact TSn N/A n: 0-2047
Timer Coil TCn N/A n: 0-2047
Counter Contact CS-n N/A n: 0-2047
Counter Coil CC-n N/A n: 0-2047
Xn, Yn, Bn : n is in hexadecimal.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RXD
(5 ) SG
(8) RTS
(7) CTS
(4) DSR (DR)
(6) DTR (ER)
Top View
RS-422
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)
RXD+ (2) SDA ( 1)
RXD- (1)
TXD+ (3)
SDB ( 2)
RDA ( 3)
TXD- (4) RDB (4)
GND (5) SG
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-86 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Mitsubishi FX Series PLC via Computer Link Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller Station number: 0.
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
NOTE
1) This communication protocol supports FX series RS485 and RS232 communication module.
2) The default setting of this communication protocol is to support RS485 communication module. If the
user needs to use RS232 communication module, the user must change the communication setting from
RS485 to RS232 manually.
3) For more detailed information regarding the communication setting method, please refer to Mitsubishi
Communication User Manual named “User’s Manual - Data Communication Edition”.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0-7679 N/A Word
Special Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 8000-8511 N/A Word
Status Relay Sn n: 0-4095 N/A Word
Input Relay Xn n: 0-377(octal) N/A Word
Output Relay Yn n: 0-377(octal) N/A Word
Timer PV Tn n: 0-255 N/A Word
16-bit Counter PV Cn n: 0-199 N/A Word
32-bit Counter PV Cn n: 200-255 N/A Double Word
Data Register Dn n: 0-7999 N/A Word
Special Data Register Dn n: 8000-8511 N/A Word
Auxiliary Relay / Special Auxiliary Relay / Status Relay / Input Relay / Output Relay: Address must be
the multiple of 16.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0-7679
Special Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 8000-8511
Status Relay Sn N/A n: 0-4095
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-87
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0-377(octal)
Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0-377(octal)
Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0-255
Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0-255
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) TXD (3)
TXD ( 3)
GND (5)
RXD (2 )
GND (5)
Top View
RS-485
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller Communication Module
D- (1 ) SDB
D- (4 )
D+ (2)
RDB
SDA
D+ (3) RDA
G ND (5) GND
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-88 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Mitsubishi J2s Series Servo Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, Even, 1 (RS-232).
Controller Station number: 0.
Control area/status area: None / None.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Parameter List (cmd: 05/84) (NOTE 1) Pn n: 0 – 84 N/A Double word
Status Display (cmd: 01,8n/NA) (NOTE 1) Sn n: 0 – E N/A Double word
Alarm Number in history (cmd: 33,1n/NA) (NOTE 1) ANn n: 0 – 5 N/A Word
Alarm Occurrence time in history (AO) (cmd: 33,2n/NA) (NOTE 1) AOn n: 0 – 5 N/A Double word
Current Alarm Number (AC) (cmd: 02/NA) (NOTE 1) ACn n: 0 N/A Word
Status Display at alarm occurrence (AS) (cmd: 35,8/NA) (NOTE 1) ASn n: 0 N/A Double word
External input pin status (EI) (cmd: 12,40/92,00) (NOTE 1) EIn n: 0 N/A Double word
External output pin status (EO) (cmd: 12,C0/92,A0) (NOTE 1) EOn n: 0 N/A Double word
Operation mode selection (OP) (cmd: NA/8B,00) (NOTE 1) OPn n: 0 N/A Word
Speed for test operation (TSPD) (cmd: NA/A0,10) (NOTE 1) TSPDn n: 0 N/A Word
Acceleration/deceleration for test operation (TACC) (cmd: NA/A0,11) (NOTE 1)
TACCn n: 0 N/A Double word
Distance for test operation (TDIS) (cmd: NA/A0,13) (NOTE 1) TDISn n: 0 N/A Double word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Status display clear (SRST) (cmd: NA/81,00) (NOTE 1) SRSTb N/A b: 0
Alarm history clear (ACLR) (cmd: NA/82,20) (NOTE 1) ACLRb N/A b: 0
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-89
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Alarm reset (ARST) (cmd: NA/82,00) (NOTE 1) ARSTb N/A b: 0
Turn off the external input signals (DI) (OFDI) (cmd: NA/90,00) (NOTE 1) OFDIb N/A b: 0
Changes the external output signals (DO) (CHDO) (cmd: NA/90,03) (NOTE 1) CHDOb N/A b: 0
Enable the disabled external input signals (ENDI) (cmd: NA/90,10) (NOTE 1) ENDIb N/A b: 0
Enable the disabled external output signals (ENDO) (cmd: NA/90,13) (NOTE 1) ENDOb N/A b: 0
Clear the time constant of acceleration in test operation mode (TCLR) (cmd: NA/A0,12) (NOTE 1)
TCLRb N/A b: 0
Temporary stop of position mode in test operation (TSTP) (cmd: NA/A0,15) (NOTE 1)
TSTPb N/A b: 0
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 20 pin CN3
GND (5 ) GND (1)
GND (11)
RXD (2 ) TXD ( 12)
TXD (3) RXD (2)
NOTE
1) Read / Write Limit
This communication protocol uses devices to simulate the operation of Servo, so there is a limit for the
device to read and write the command. In the column of register type and contact type, the string of
characters after “cmd:” indicates the corresponding Servo command that the device will read and write.
For example, the string of characters after “cmd:” of the register, Status display is 01,8n/NA. It means
that the device can read it but cannot write it. One more example, the string of characters after “cmd:” of
the Operation mode selection (OP) is N/A/8B,00. It means that the device can write it but cannot read it.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-90 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
MKS BY125 Low Cost Synchrocontroller Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller Station number: 11 (NOTE 1).
Control area/status area: None / None.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
n: 0 ~ 17,
40 ~ 41,
45 ~ 48,
50,
Data In Register / Setup Register Cn
90 ~ 92
N/A Double Word
Synchronizing (Differential Counter) SYN_ERRn n: 0 N/A Double Word
Integration register IRn n: 0 N/A Double Word
Actual Master speed MAS_SPDn n: 0 N/A Double Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Reset RSTn N/A n: 0
Jog Trim+ JOGTRIM_INCn N/A n: 0
Jog Trim- JOGTRIM_DECn N/A n: 0
Activate Data ACT_DATAn N/A n: 0
Store EEPROM STR_EEPROMn N/A n: 0
Index Slave IND_SLAn N/A n: 0
Index Master IND_MASn N/A n: 0
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-91
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 20 pin CN3
Controller 20 pin CN3
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) SG
Top View
RS-485
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485) Controller Controller
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) SG
Top View
NOTE
1) The valid station number is in the range of 11 to 99. However, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 cannot
be used as they are all broadcast station number.
00 for all broadcast
10 for the broadcast to 11 ~ 19
20 for the broadcast to 21 ~ 29
and vise versa.
2) Now the broadcast function is not provided, therefore, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 cannot be used.
3) Only one data (1 Word/ 1 Double Word / 1 Bit) can be read and written for each communication. So, the
“Optimize” (Optimization for reading) selection in “Communication” tab in the “Configuration” dialog box
in “Options” menu (Options Configuration Communication) is cancelled.
4) When using RS-232 communication, the user only can use 3 pins (Pin 2, Pin 3 and Pin 5). DO NOT use
5 pins for RS-232 communication. Also, Pin 9 is for +5V. Do not confuse and connect to the wrong pin;
otherwise the serious damage may occur.
5) The effective addresses of Cn are not consecutive (5 blocks: C0~17, C40~41, C45~C48, C50,
C90~C92). When setting the addresses, do not exceed the block range. For example, when using a
Numeric Entry or Character Entry element, if the address is C15, the data length only can be 6 Words
Pin1
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-92 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
(C15, C16, C17). If the data length is out of this range, i.e. occupy other addresses except C0~C17, an
error may occur.
6) The effective addresses of Cn are not consecutive (5 blocks: C0~17, C40~41, C45~C48, C50,
C90~C92). However, when executing duplicate function (Decrease Address), the addresses will be
regarded as consecutive addresses. For example, the next address of C90 is C50; the next address of
C50 is C48; the next address of C45 is C41; the next address of C40 is C17.
7) When all Word address is written, the controllers all response ACK(0x06). But when all Word address is
read, the receive value will not change. The user needs to press ACT_DATA0 again and then the
receive value will be updated.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-93
MKS CT150 Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, E, 1. (RS-232)
Controller Station number: 11.
Control area/status area: None / None.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Data In Register Cn n: 0 ~ 25 N/A
Setup Register Cn n: 40 ~ 43 N/A
45 ~ 50
90 ~ 97
Error Count Err_CNT 0 N/A
LV Value LV_VAL 0 N/A
Printmark Error PRTMARK_ERR 0 N/A
Batch Counter BAT_CNT 0 N/A
Waste Counter WASTE_CNT 0 N/A
Line Speed LINE_SPD 0 N/A
Actual Cutting Length ACT_CUT_LEN 0 N/A
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Reset RST N/A 0
Jog Trim+ JOGTRIM_INC N/A 0
Jog Trim- JOGTRIM_DEC N/A 0
Read PI READ_PI N/A 0
Activate Data ACT_DATA N/A 0
Store Eeprom STR_EEPROM N/A 0
Start/Stop START_STOP N/A 0
Reset Mark Counter RSTMARK_CNT N/A 0
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-94 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) SG
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-95
MKS MC700/720 Motion Controller Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller Station number: 11 (NOTE 1).
Control area/status area: None / None.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
General Parameters GPn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word
Parameter Block for Slave 1 PB1_n n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word
Parameter Block for Slave 2 PB2_n n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word
Parameter Block for Slave 3 PB3_n n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word
Parameter Block for Slave 4 PB4_n n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word
Process Data PRODn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word
Communication Settings CSETn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word
Setup Settings STUPn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word
Status of Commands and Outputs S_COn n: 0 ~ 4 N/A Double Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Commands CMDb N/A b: 0 ~ 31
Outputs OUTb N/A b: 0 ~ 31
Status of Commands and Outputs S_COn.b n: 0 ~ 4 b: 0 ~ 31
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-96 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (3 ) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2 ) RXD
(5 ) GND
Top View
RS-422
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
RXD- (1 ) (7 )T-
RXD+ (2)
TXD+ (3 )
(8 )T+
(6 )R+
TXD- (4) (1 )R-
Top View
RS-485
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
D+ (2 )T+ (8)
D+ (3 )
D- (1)T-(7)
D- (4)
Top View
NOTE
1) The valid station number is in the range of 11 to 99. However, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 cannot
be used as they are all broadcast station number.
00 for all broadcast
10 for the broadcast to 11 ~ 19
20 for the broadcast to 21 ~ 29
and vise versa.
2) Now the broadcast function is not provided, therefore, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 cannot be used.
Pin1
Pin1
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-97
3) Only one data (1 Word/ 1 Double Word / 1 Bit) can be read and written for each communication. So, the
“Optimize” (Optimization for reading) selection in “Communication” tab in the “Configuration” dialog box
in “Options” menu (Options Configuration Communication) is cancelled.
4) When using RS-232 communication, the user only can use 3 pins (Pin 2, Pin 3 and Pin 5). DO NOT use
5 pins for RS-232 communication. Also, Pin 9 is for +5V. Do not confuse and connect to the wrong pin;
otherwise the serious damage may occur.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-98 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Modbus(Master) --- 984 RTU / ASCII mode Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1. (ASCII)
9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (RTU)
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: W40100 / W40200.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word
Input Registers Wn n: 30001 ~ 40000 N/A Word
Input Registers is “read only”.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 10000
Discrete Inputs Bn N/A n: 10001 ~ 20000
Discrete Inputs is “read only”.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
Please refer to 1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication for detail.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-99
Modbus Hexadecimal Address (Master) --- RTU / ASCII mode Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1. (ASCII)
9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (RTU)
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: RW-0 / RW-10.
NOTE
1) The valid communication address starts from 0 and the format is hexadecimal. So the settable range are
0 to 65535 (i.e. 0 ~ FFFF in hexadecimal format).
2) The difference than “Standard Modbus” communication: (Protocol is the same)
The usage of setting communication address is different.
The range of communication address is different
The “Standard Modbus” communication is in decimal format. The start addresses are 40001, 30001, 1,
10001 and contains 10000 addresses respectively (40001 ~ 50000, 30001 ~ 40000, 1 ~ 10000, 10001 ~
20000).
The Modbus Hexadecimal Address (Master) is in hexadecimal format. The starting addresses are all
from 0 and there is 65536 addressing space (from 0 to FFFF) in each PDU (protocol data unit).
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Output Registers RW-n n: 0 ~ FFFF N/A Word
Input Registers R-n n: 0 ~ FFFF N/A Word
RW- : can Read and Write.
Converting the address to decimal format and plus 40001, it will immediately become the corresponding
“Standard Modbus” communication address.
R- (Input Registers) : Read only.
Converting the address to decimal format and plus 30001, it will immediately become the corresponding
“Standard Modbus” communication address.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-100 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Discrete Outputs RWB-n N/A n: 0 ~ FFFF
Discrete Inputs RB-n N/A n: 0 ~ FFFF
RWB- : can Read and Write.
Converting the address to decimal format and plus 1, it will immediately become the corresponding
“Standard Modbus” communication address.
RB- (Discrete Inputs) : Read only.
Converting the address to decimal format and plus 10001, it will immediately become the corresponding
“Standard Modbus” communication address.
NOTE
1) Only first 10000 addresses can be converted to ”Standard Modbus” communication address.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-101
Modbus nW (Master) --- RTU / ASCII mode Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1. (ASCII)
9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (RTU)
Controller station number: 1.
Control area/status area: W40100 / W40200.
NOTE
1) This driver can read consecutive communication address on the screen via one Modbus command to
improve the communication efficiency. For example, if there are 6 devices on the screen, and read the
data of the addresses W40100, W40101, W40102, W40200, W40201, W40300. It will read three times.
It will read W40100 3 Words at the first time, read W40200 2 Words at the second time and read
W40300 1 Word at the third time.
2) Ensure to check the box next to “Optimize” (Optimization for reading) selection in “Communication” tab in
the “Configuration” dialog box in “Options” menu (Options Configuration Communication). If
“Optimize” selection is unchecked, do not select “Data Length Limit”.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word
Input Registers Wn n: 30001 ~ 40000 N/A Word
Input Registers is “read only”.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 10000
Discrete Inputs Bn N/A n: 10001 ~ 20000
Discrete Inputs is “read only”.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
Please refer to 1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication for detail.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-102 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Modbus (Slave) --- RTU / ASCII mode Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1. (ASCII)
9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (RTU)
Controller station number: 0. (Station number is not used in the protocol.)
Control area/status area: W40100 / 40200.
NOTE
1) HMI station number is Slave station number. (default setting is 0)
2) The relation between Modbus address and HMI internal registers.
Modbus address Data definition in HMI
W40001 ~ W41024 $0 ~ $1023 Internal register
W42001 ~ W43024 $M0 ~ $M1023 Non-volatile internal register
W44001 RCPNO Receipt number register
W45001 ~ ... RCP0 ~ RCPn Receipt register
B00001 ~ B01024 $2000.0 ~ $2063.15 Internal register (Bit)
B01025 ~ B02048 $M200.0 ~ $M263.15 Non-volatile internal register (Bit)
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 2048
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
Please refer to 1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication for detail.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-103
CrossReference Table (Inter Memoryof Delta HMI and Modbus Reference Address)
Inter Memory of Delta HMI
Modbus Reference Address
Supporting Modbus Function Address of Function
$0 40001 03H, 06H, 10H 0000H
$1 40002 03H, 06H, 10H 0001H
.
.
.
$1023 41024 03H, 06H, 10H 03FFH
$M0 42001 03H, 06H, 10H 07D0H
$M1 42002 03H, 06H, 10H 07D1H
.
.
.
$M1023 43024 03H, 06H, 10H 0BCFH
RCPNO 44001 03H, 06H 0FA0H
RCP0 45001 03H, 06H, 10H 1388H
RCP1 45002 03H, 06H, 10H 1389H
.
.
.
$2000.0 00001 01H, 05H, 0FH 0000H
$2000.1 00002 01H, 05H, 0FH 0001H
.
.
.
$2000.15 00016 01H, 05H, 0FH 000FH
$2001.0 00017 01H, 05H, 0FH 0010H
.
.
.
$2063.0 01009 01H, 05H, 0FH 03F0H
.
.
.
$2063.15 01024 01H, 05H, 0FH 03FFH
$M200.0 01025 01H, 05H, 0FH 0400H
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-104 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Inter Memory of Delta HMI
Modbus Reference Address
Supporting Modbus Function Address of Function
$M200.1 01026 01H, 05H, 0FH 0401H
.
.
.
$M200.15 01040 01H, 05H, 0FH 040FH
$M201.0 01041 01H, 05H, 0FH 0410H
.
.
.
$M263.0 02033 01H, 05H, 0FH 07F0H
.
.
.
$M263.15 02048 01H, 05H, 0FH 07FFH
For example:
1. Read internal memory $100 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 03 00 64 00 01 97 CR LF
Write the value of 1000 into internal memory $100 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 06 00 64 03 E8 AA CR LF
2. Read internal memory $M100 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 03 08 34 00 01 BF CR LF
Write the value of 888 into internal memory $M100 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 06 08 34 03 78 42 CR LF
3. Read internal memory $2000.15 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 01 00 0F 00 01 EE CR LF
Set internal memory $2000.15 of Delta HMI to ON (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 05 00 0F FF 00 EC CR LF
Set internal memory $2000.15 of Delta HMI to OFF (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 05 00 0F 00 00 EB CR LF
4. Read internal memory $M201.0 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 01 04 10 00 01 E9 CR LF
Set internal memory $M201.0 of Delta HMI to ON (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 05 04 10 FF 00 E7 CR LF
Set internal memory $M201.0 of Delta HMI to OFF (HMI station number: 1)
: 01 05 04 10 00 00 E6 CR LF
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-105
Modicon TSX Micro (Uni-Telway) Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.
Controller station number: 2.
Control area/status area: %MW0 / %MW10.
NOTE
1) HMI station needs to be adjusted to 1 ~ 8.
2) PLC station and HMI station can be the same.
3) The internal memory and relative parameters in PLC should be set properly first. Otherwise, it cannot
communicate except %S.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size
WORD_DEVICE_ Internal %MWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_ System %SWn n: 0 ~ 127 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_ Input %KWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A Word
%KWn is “read only”.
Contacts
Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.
BIT_DEVICE_ Internal %Mn:b n:0 ~ 65534 b:0 ~ 15
BIT_DEVICE_ System %Sn - n:0 ~ 127
BIT_DEVICE_ Internal1 %Mn - n:0 ~ 65534
%Mn: b is Bit address that corresponds to WORD_DEVICE_ Internal (%MWn).
%Mn is PLC internal relay address.
The read/write range of WORD_DEVICE_ Internal / BIT_DEVICE_ Internal depends on PLC used
memory.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-106 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
It needs to use specific cable of Modicon Uni-Telway. (RS-232) --- TSX PCX 1031
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (2 ) SD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3 ) RD
(5 ) SG
Top View
RS-485
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-485)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male
(RS-485)
RXD+ (2) (1) D+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1)
TXD- (4)
(2) D-
Top View
Pin1
1 2
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-107
Modicon TSX Micro (Modbus RTU) Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.
Controller station number: 2.
Control area/status area: %MW0 / %MW10.
NOTE
1) HMI must select Modbus (Master) --- 984 RTU as the communication mode.
2) The communication mode of PLC should be switched to Modbus Slave by using PL7 software.
B. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-485
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-485)
Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male
(RS-485)
RXD+ (2) (1 ) D+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1 )
TXD- (4)
(2 ) D-
(5 )
(7 )
Top View
7
1 2 5
7
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-108 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Modicon TWIDO Back to Table
Its function is the same as Modbus (Master) --- 984 RTU.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-109
Moeller PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, NONE, 1(RS-232).
Controller Station number: 2.
Control area/status area: MW0/MW10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data Length
Marker MW MWn n: 0-32766 N/A Byte
Diagnostic Status DSW DSWn n: 0-0 N/A Byte
Process Status PSW PSWn n: 0-0 N/A Byte
Diagnostic Counter DC DCn n: 0-15 N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Marker M Mn.b n: 0-32766 b: 0-7
Diagnostic Status DS DSn.b n: 0-1 b: 0-7
Process Status PS PSn.b n: 0-1 b: 0-7
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) 5
TXD (3)
GND (5)
2
3 Top View
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-110 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
NOTE
1) Communication Setting
The read and write range of register Marker (Device MW) of PS4 Series must be set via PC software or
PLC program before connecting to HMI; otherwise, the communication error may occur. The setting
range of Marker (Device MW) of PS3 Series is fixed between 0 and 2172 but the address 126 cannot be
used.
2) Device MW
Device MW is an even address, but Device M is not.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-111
NIKKI DENSO NCS-FI/FS Series Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 2.
Controller station number: 1. (valid station number: 0 ~ 99)
Control area/status area: None.
NOTE
1) The valid station number is in the range of 0 to 99. If the station number is out of this range, it will
subtracted 100 from itself automatically until the station number is in the valid range.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size
WORD_DEVICE_ RRegister RW-n n: 0 ~ 3999 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_ RRegister RW-n n: 8000 ~ 9999 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_ DStatus XW-n n: 0 ~ 8 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_ DStatus DW-n n: 0 ~ 129 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_ RRegister RD-n n: 0-3999 N/A Double Word
WORD_DEVICE_ RRegister RD-n n: 8000-9999 N/A Double Word
WORD_DEVICE_ DStatus DD-n n: 0-129 N/A Double Word
NOTE
In order for DOP series HMI to be compatible with this controller, DOP series HMI provides various types of
data. Please refer to the following description:
1) RW-n, RD-n, RB-nb all have corresponding relation (just the data format is different). They all refer to the
same address n.
DW-n, DD-n both have corresponding relation (just the data format is different). They all refer to the
same address n.
XW-n, XB-nb both have corresponding relation (just the data format is different). They all refer to the
same address n.
(In the above format name, the second alphabet represents the data format, W represents Word, D
represents Double Word and B represents Bit)
2) The data size of RW-n, DW-n is defined as Word in DOP series HMI and each data address is regarded
as an individual Word address. The data order uses "Little Endian" architecture which means that the low
word of the number is stored in memory at the lowest address, and the high word at the highest address.
(such as Intel processors (those used in PC's) use "Little Endian" byte order)
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-112 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
For example, if setting the starting address as RW900 and the data size is Double Word, the read/write
value will be a Double Word which contains RW900(low word) and RW901(high word).
In actual application case, if the user sets the data size of RW-n, DW-n as Word, there is no data order
reverse problem. However, if the user sets the data size of RW-n, DW-n as Double Word, as this
controller use "Big Endian" architecture which means that the high word of the number is stored in
memory at the lowest address, and the low word at the highest address (such as Motorola processors
(those used in Mac's) use "Big Endian" byte order), a data order reverse problem will occur.
3) The data size of RD-n, DD-n is defined as Double Word in DOP series HMI and every two data
addresses is regarded as an individual Double Word address. The data order use "Big Endian"
architecture (see the meaning above).
For example, if setting the starting address as RD900 and the data size is Double Word, the read/write
value will be a Double Word which contains RW900(high word) and RW901(low word).
In actual application case, if the users set the data size of RD-n, DD-n as Double Word, there is no data
order reverse problem and the data display on HMI and the controller will be the same. However, if the
users set the data size of RD-n, DD-n as Word, only the low word will display and the high word will be
set to 0 automatically. For example, if setting the starting address as RD900 and the data size is Word,
only the value of RD901(low word) will display. If the write value is 100 at this time, DOP series HMI will
set the value of RD901(high word) to 0 and write the value 100 into RD901(low word).
4) X-nb and DW-n both have corresponding relation -------- Read DW-n, Write X-nb
DW-0 — X-0b, (b=0~F) DW-1 — X-1b, (b=0~F) DW-2 — X-2b, (b=0~F) DW-4 — X-3b, (b=0~F) DW-104 — X-4b, (b=0~F) DW-105 — X-5b, (b=0~F) DW-106 — X-6b, (b=0~F) DW-107 — X-7b, (b=0~F) DW-108 — X-8b, (b=0~F)
5) DW-n, DD-n are “read only”. If the users write any value into them, HMI will show error message
“Command Can Not be Executed…. ” on the screen.
Contacts
Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.
BIT_DEVICE_ RRegister RB-nb n: 0 ~ 3999 b:0 ~ F
BIT_DEVICE_ RRegister RB-nb n: 8000 ~ 9999 b:0 ~ F
BIT_DEVICE_ BitControl XB-nb n:0 ~ 8 b:0 ~ F
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-113
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-422
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 14 pin special male (RS-422)
Controller 14 pin special male (RS-422)
RXD- (1) (9) TXD (B)
RXD+ (2)
TXD+ (3)
(2) TXD (A)
(4) RXD (A)
TXD- (4) (11) RXD (B)
GND (5) (14) GND
Cable (PLC side (J1), male).
Top View
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-114 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Omron C Series PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 2.
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: DM0 / DM10.
This driver can support OMRON C/CPM series PLC simultaneously.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
IR area IRn n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word
HR area HRn n: 0 ~ 99 N/A Word
AR area ARn n: 0 ~ 27 N/A Word
LR area LRn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word
TC area TCn n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word
DM area DMn n: 0 ~ 6655 N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
IR area IRnb n: 0 ~ 511 b: 00 ~ 15
HR area HRnb n: 0 ~ 99 b: 00 ~ 15
AR area ARnb n: 0 ~ 27 b: 00 ~ 15
LR area LRnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 00 ~ 15
TC area TCn N/A n: 0 ~ 511
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
1:1 Host Link via RS-232C converter
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RXD
(9) SG
(4) RS
(5) CS
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-115
DOP
9 pin D-SUB male (RS-432) Controller
25 pin D-SUB male (RS-432) Controller
25 pin D-SUB male (RS-432)
RXD (2) (2 ) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3 ) RXD
(7 ) SG
(4 ) RS
(5 ) CS
RS-422
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
RXD- (1 ) (9 )TXD-
RXD+ (2)
TXD+ (3)
(5 )TXD+
(1 )RXD+
TXD- (4) (6 )RXD-
Top View
Pin1
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-116 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Omron CJ1/CS1 Series PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 2. (RS-232)
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
This driver can support OMRON CS/CJ/CP1/CQM/CV/CVM series PLC simultaneously.
NOTE
The meaning of Communication Error Message:
1) Word Device:
The Device Name and Address Value will display. For example, if using CIO, H, A, D, E, T, C, W, EM, IR,
DR, TK, it will show CIOn, Hn, An, Dn, Em.n, Tn, Cn, Wn, EMn, IRn, DRn, TKn respectively. “n” is the
Address Value.
2) Bit Device:
The Device Name and Word Address Value will display, but the Bit Address Value will not. For example,
if using CIO, H, A, D, E, T, C, W, EM, IR, DR, TK, it will show CIOBn, HBn, ABn, DBn, EBm.n, TBn, CBn,
WBn, EMBn, IRBn, DRBn, TKBn respectively. “n” is the Word Address Value.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
CIO area CIOn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word
Hold area Hn n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word
Auxiliary area An n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word
DM area Dn n: 0 ~ 65535 N/A Word
EM area Em.n M: 0 ~ 12 (bank no.) n: 0 ~ 65535
N/A Word
Timer PVs Tn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word
Counter PVs Cn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word
Work area Wn n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word
EM Current Bank area EMn n: 0 ~ 65535 N/A Word
Index Register IRn n: 0 ~ 99 N/A Double Word
DR area DRn n: 0 ~ 99 N/A Word
TK area TKn n: 0 ~ 1022 (Even No.) N/A Byte
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-117
CJ1M Models: An: A0-A477 is “read only”.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
CIO area CIOBnbb n: 0 ~ 9999 bb: 00 ~ 15
Hold area HBnbb n: 0 ~ 999 bb: 00 ~ 15
Auxiliary area ABnbb n: 0 ~ 999 bb: 00 ~ 15
DM area DBnbb n: 0 ~ 65535 bb: 00 ~ 15
EM area EBm.nbb n: 0 ~ 65535
m: 0 ~ 12 (bank no.) bb: 00 ~ 15
Timer area TBn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999
Counter area CBn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999
Work area WBnbb n: 0 ~ 999 bb: 00 ~ 15
EM Current Bank area EMBnbb n: 0 ~ 65535 bb: 00 ~ 15
Index Register IRBnbb n: 0 ~ 99 bb: 00 ~ 31
DR area DRBnbb n: 0 ~ 99 bb: 00 ~ 15
TK area TKBnbb n: 0 ~ 1022 (Even No.)
bb: 00 ~ 15
NOTE
1) The following address cannot be written:
IRn and DRn: It is not valid if the users write them. HMI will not show any error message if the write
operation is done.
An and Abnbb: Some range of An and Abnbb (Auxiliary area) is “read only”.
TKn / TKBnbb / TBn / CBn / EMBnbb / IRBnbb / DRBnbb: Writing these addresses is not allowed. If
the write operation is done, the error will occur and display the error message “Command Can Not
be Executed…” on the screen of HMI.
2) The unit of IR address is “Double Word”.
3) The unit of TK address is “Byte” and it should be even number.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-118 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
CJ1M CPU module
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) RXD
(9) SG
(4) RS
(5) CS
Top View
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-432)
Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-432)
Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-432)
RXD (2) (2 ) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3 ) RXD
(7 ) SG
(4 ) RS
(5 ) CS
RS-422
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
RXD- (1 ) (9 )TXD-
RXD+ (2)
TXD+ (3)
(5 )TXD+
(1 )RXD+
TXD- (4) (6 )RXD-
Top View
Pin1
Pin1
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-119
Omron TPM1A PLC Back to Table
Its function is the same as Omron C Series PLC.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-120 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Siemens S7 200 PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1.
Controller station number: 2.
Control area/status area: VW0 / VW10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Register
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Timer Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A
Analog Input Word AIWn n: 0 ~ 30 N/A
Counter Cn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A
Analog Output Word AQWn n: 0 ~ 30 N/A
Input Image IWn n: 0 ~ 14 N/A
Input Image IDn n: 0 ~ 12 N/A
Output Image QWn n: 0 ~ 14 N/A
Output Image QDn n: 0 ~ 12 N/A
Special Bits SMWn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A
Special Bits SMDn n: 0 ~ 197 N/A
Internal Bits MWn n: 0 ~ 98 N/A
Internal Bits MDn n: 0 ~ 96 N/A
Data Area VWn n: 0 ~ 9998 N/A
(DBWn) (n: 0 ~ 9998)
Data Area VDn n: 0 ~ 9996 N/A
Special S SWn n: 0 ~ 99 N/A
Special S SDn n: 0 ~ 97 N/A
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Timer Bit Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Counter Bit Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Input Image In.b n: 0 ~ 15 b: 0 ~ 7
Output Image Qn.b n: 0 ~ 15 b: 0 ~ 7
Special Bit SMn.b n: 0 ~ 200 b: 0 ~ 7
Internal Bit Mn.b n: 0 ~ 99 b: 0 ~ 7
Data Area Bit Vn.b n: 0 ~ 9999 b: 0 ~ 7
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-121
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Special S Bit Sn.b n: 0 ~ 100 b: 0 ~ 7
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
via RS-232 / PPI Multi-Master Cable (Connecting DOP series HMI and PPI cable)
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
RXD (2) (2) RD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(3) TD
(5) GND
Top View
RS-485
via PLC Program Port (RS-485)
DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
RXD+ (2) (3)TXD/RXD+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1)
TXD- (4)
GND (5) (5)SG
(8)TXD/RXD-
Top View
Pin1
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-122 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
Siemens S7 300 PLC (with PC Adapter) Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 38400, 8, ODD, 1. (RS-232).
Controller station number: 2.
(Communication via PC adapter, PLC station will not be used, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)
communication is allowed.)
Control area/status area: DBW0 / DBW20.
NOTE
1) PLC DB memory (DBm.DBWn, DBm.DBDn, DBm.DBXn.b) must be open so that HMI can read/write.
2) The reason for using PC adapter:
When communicating via PC adapter, it is profibus with 187.5 K baudrate at PLC side. Therefore, the
network structure is faster and steadier.
When HMI communicates with PLC without PC adapter directly, the protocol will be complicated and it
needs to lower PLC baud rate to 19200 due to HMI baudrate limit.
3) Baud rate setting
It needs to set PLC baud rate to 187.5 K and higher. (it cannot use 19.2K)
It needs to set baud rate of two sides when using PC Adapter
i) "PLC side": It needs to set same baudrate as PLC side (as previous item it needs to set
PLC baud rate to 187.5 K and higher and cannot use 19.2K)
ii) "HMI side": it can select 38.4K or 19.2K by using switch on the cable. (only these two
choices)
iii) HMI baud rate: it needs to set the baud rate of HMI side of PC adapter as previous item to
38.4K or 19.2K) (protocol setting is still 8, ODD, 1)
iv) There is no setting for PLC station and HMI station, so it won’t have the communication
problem with error station setting.
v) PC Adapter :
The power LED will be lit once connect to PLC. (power supply of PC adapter is from PLC)
If communication is OK, the communication LED will be blink. Otherwise, it will be dark.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Register
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Image IWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
Input Image IDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-123
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Output Image QWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
Output Image QDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
Internal Bits MWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
Internal Bits MDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
Data Area DBm.DBWn n: 0 ~ 65534 m: 1 ~ 255
DBm.DBDn n: 0 ~ 65532 m: 1 ~ 255
Data Area (DB10) DBWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
DBDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
VWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
VDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
Timer Tn n: 0-65535 N/A
Counter Cn n: 0-65535 N/A
NOTE
1) The valid digit number of the value for the T(Timer) and C(Counter) is 3-digits only. Therefore, please
enter a 3-digit number. If entering a number that exceeds 3 digits, only the first 3 digits are valid (decimal
format). The other digits of the value for the T(Timer) will be replaced as 0 and the other digits of the
value for the C(Counter) will be abandoned. For example, assume that the users enter the value “12345”,
the actual write value for the T(Timer) will be “12300” and the actual write value for the C(Counter) will be
“123”.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Image In.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7
Output Image Qn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7
Internal Bit Mn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7
Data Area Bit DBm.DBXn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7
m = 1 ~ 255
Data Area Bit (10 DB) DBXn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7
Vn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7
NOTE
1) For all contacts when performing “Multiple Duplicate” function:
If it exceeds 65535 when increasing, it will be regarded as 0.
If it is less than 0, it will be regarded as 655XX.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-124 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
HMI connects to PC Adaptor
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male
Controller 9 pin D-SUB female Controller
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) GND
(8) CTS
(7) RTS
RTS (7)
CTS (8)
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-125
Siemens S7 300 PLC (without PC Adaptor) Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 19200, 8, EVEN, 1. (RS-485).
Controller station number: 2.
Control area/status area: DBW0 / DBW20.
NOTE
1) Please notice that only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication is allowed.
2) PLC baud rate should be changed to 19200. (8, EVEN, 1.).
3) DB must be open, otherwise the related addresses can not be read and write.
(The related addresses are: DB.DBW, DB.DBD, DBW, DBD, VW, VD, DB.DBX, DBX, V)
4) HMI station must be set to 0 ~ 15. If it is out of this range, it will be changed to 15 automatically. PLC
station number must be set to 0 ~ 15.
5) The communication cable is the same as S7 200 series (RS-485).
6) If not connecting to communication cable after 5 seconds, HMI will show error message on the screen. If
connecting to communication cable, it is needed to power on HMI again, and then the communication
can be found.
7) After power in connected to HMI, HMI must accept the notification from PLC and then connection will be
established. The first time connection will take more time, but in normal condition, it should be connected
in 5 seconds.
8) This protocol is a token ring communication protocol (HMI needs to communicate with PLC for many
times for completing 1 command.) so the response of HMI will be slower (compared with other brands of
PLCs when the baud rate setting is set to the same value). The communication speed of S7 300 PLC
(without PC Adaptor) is usually slower than the other controllers, but it is the same as the communication
speed of S7 300 PLC (with PC Adaptor).
9) When connecting to S7 300 PLC, the communication error may occur occasionally. The user can adjust
the HMI communication response time via Extra function which can be found by clicking Option >
Configuration > Communication.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-126 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
How many COM ports are connected to S7 300 PLC, how may items can be set.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-127
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Register
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Image IWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
Input Image IDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
Output Image QWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
Output Image QDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
Internal Bits MWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
Internal Bits MDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
Data Area DBm.DBWn n: 0 ~ 65534 m: 1 ~ 255 (Note 1)
DBm.DBDn n: 0 ~ 65532 m: 1 ~ 255 (Note 1)
Data Area (DB10) DBWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
DBDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
VWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A
VDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A
Timer Tn n: 0 ~ 65535 N/A
Counter Cn n: 0 ~ 65535 N/A
NOTE
1) High Byte of Bit No.
The valid digit number of the value for the T(Timer) and C(Counter) is 3-digits only. Therefore, please
enter a 3-digit number. If entering a number that exceeds 3 digits, only the first 3 digits are valid (decimal
format). The other digits of the value for the T(Timer) will be replaced as 0 and the other digits of the
value for the C(Counter) will be abandoned. For example, assume that the users enter the value “12345”,
the actual write value for the T(Timer) will be “12300” and the actual write value for the C(Counter) will
be “123”.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Image In.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)
Output Image Qn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)
Internal Bit Mn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)
Data Area Bit DBm.DBXn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)
m = 1 ~ 255 (Note 3)
Data Area Bit (DB 10) DBXn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)
Vn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-128 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
NOTE
2) Low Byte of Bit No.
3) High Byte of Bit No.
4) For all timers, counters and contacts when performing “Multiple Duplicate” function:
If it exceeds 65535 when increasing, it will be regarded as 0.
If it is less than 0, it will be regarded as 655XX.
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
The communication cable is the same as S7 200 series (RS-485). Please refer to the Connections of S7 200
series (RS-485).
RS-485
via PLC MPI Port (RS-485)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male
(RS-485)
RXD+ (2) (3)TXD/RXD+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1)
TXD- (4)
GND (5) (5)SG
(8)TXD/RXD-
Top View
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-129
Taian TP02 PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 19200, 7, None, 1.
Controller station number: 1.
Control area/status area: V1 / V10.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
WORD_DEVICE_X Xn n: 1 ~ 384 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_Y Yn n: 1 ~ 384 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_C Cn n: 1 ~ 2048 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_V Vn n: 1 ~ 1024 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_D Dn n: 1 ~ 2048 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_WS WSn n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_WC WCn n: 1 ~ 912 N/A Word
WORD_DEVICE_X / WORD_DEVICE_Y / WORD_DEVICE_C: Address must be 1 or the multiple of
16+1.
Contacts
Read/Write Range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
BIT_DEVICE_X Xn N/A n: 1 ~ 384
BIT_DEVICE_Y Yn N/A n: 1 ~ 384
BIT_DEVICE_C Cn N/A n: 1 ~ 2048
BIT_DEVICE_SC SCn N/A n: 1 ~ 128
BIT_DEVICE_SC: Only 1 Bit can be transferred for each read command.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-130 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-422
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)
RXD+ (2) (3) TXD+
RXD- (1)
TXD+ (3)
(8) TXD-
(2) RXD+
(7) RXD-TXD- (4)
Top View
RS-485
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller RS-485 (T/R+, T/R-)
RXD+ (2) T/R+
TXD+ (3)
RXD- (1)
TXD- (4) T/R-
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-131
Vigor M Series Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 19200, 7, EVEN, 1.
Controller station number: 0.
Control area/status area: D0 / D10.
NOTE
1) Controller station number: 0 for PROGRAMMER PORT; 1 for COM PORT
2) VB series also can use this driver.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Read/Write Range Register Type Format
Word No. Bit No. Data length
Input Relay Xn n: 0 ~ 770 (Octal) N/A Word (multiple of 8)
Output Relay Yn n: 0 ~ 770 (Octal) N/A Word (multiple of 8)
Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 5112 N/A Word (multiple of 8)
Special Relay Mn n: 9000 ~ 9248 N/A Word (9000 + multiple of 8)
Step Relay Sn n: 0 ~ 992 N/A Word (multiple of 8)
Timer Present Value Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word
16-bit Counter Present Value Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word
32-bit Counter Present Value Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Word
Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word
Special Data Register Dn n: 9000 ~ 9248 N/A Word
Contacts
Read/Write range Contact type Format
Word No. Bit No.
Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 777(Octal)
Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 777(Octal)
Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 5119
Special Relay Mn N/A n: 9000 ~ 9255
Step Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 999
Timer Contact Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Counter Contact Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Timer Coil TCn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Counter Coil CCn N/A n: 0 ~ 255
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-132 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
RS-232
(PROGRAMMER PORT)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male(RS-232)
Controller USB TAPE A Connector
Controller USB TAPE A Connector
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(4) GND
Top View
(COM PORT)
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)
Controller 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)
RXD (2) (3) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) GND
Top View
4 3 2
Pin1
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-133
VIPA PLC Back to Table
Its function is the same as Siemens S7 300 PLC (with PC Adaptor).
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-134 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
YOKOGAWA ACE PLC Back to Table
A. HMI factory settings
Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (ASCII code)
Controller station number: 1.
CPU NO. : 1.
Control area/status area: D1 / D10.
NOTE
1) CheckSum and End character (CR, LF) are not used during communication. Therefore, the controller
should be set to “Not using CheckSum and End character”.
2) CPU number is used during communication, however, Screen Editor software does not have this
selection. Therefore, if the user desires to set CPU number, please set HMI station number in “General”
tab in the ”Configuration” dialog box in “Options” menu (Options ”Configuration” General). (HMI
station number is regarded as CPU number. The default setting of HMI station number is 0, but 0 is an
illegal number, the user must set it as a legal value.
B. Definition of controller Read/Write address
Registers
Register Type Format Word No. Data Size
WORD_DEVICE_X Xn n: 201 ~ 65464 Word
WORD_DEVICE_Y Yn n: 201 ~ 65464 Word
WORD_DEVICE_I In n: 1 ~ 16384 Word
WORD_DEVICE_E En n: 1 ~ 4096 Word
WORD_DEVICE_L Ln n: 1 ~ 65488 Word
WORD_DEVICE_M Mn n: 1 ~ 9984 Word
WORD_DEVICE_TP TPn n: 1 ~ 3072 Word
WORD_DEVICE_CP CPn n: 1 ~ 3072 Word
WORD_DEVICE_D Dn n: 1 ~ 8192 Word
WORD_DEVICE_B Bn n: 1 ~ 32768 Word
WORD_DEVICE_W Wn n: 1 ~ 65499 Word
WORD_DEVICE_Z Zn n: 1 ~ 512 Word
WORD_DEVICE_V Vn n: 1 ~ 64 Word
WORD_DEVICE_R Rn n: 1 ~ 4096 Word
WORD_DEVICE_TS TSn n: 1 ~ 3072 Word
WORD_DEVICE_CS CSn n: 1 ~ 3072 Word
WORD_DEVICE_X / WORD_DEVICE_Y: The last two digits of address must be 1 or the multiple of
16+1 and less than 65.
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-135
WORD_DEVICE_I / WORD_DEVICE_E / WORD_DEVICE_L / WORD_DEVICE_M: Address must be 1
or the multiple of 16+1.
WORD_DEVICE_X / WORD_DEVICE_Y / WORD_DEVICE_L / WORD_DEVICE_W: Valid address is
inconsecutive.
Contacts
Contact type Format Bit No.
BIT_DEVICE_X Xn n: 201 ~ 65464
BIT_DEVICE_Y Yn n: 201 ~ 65464
BIT_DEVICE_I In n: 1 ~ 16384
BIT_DEVICE_E En n: 1 ~ 4096
BIT_DEVICE_L Ln n: 1 ~ 65488
BIT_DEVICE_M Mn n: 1 ~ 9984
BIT_DEVICE_TU TUn n: 1 ~ 3072
BIT_DEVICE_CU CUn n: 1 ~ 3072
BIT_DEVICE_X / BIT_DEVICE_Y : the last two digits of address must be less than 65 (1 ~ 64).
BIT_DEVICE_X / BIT _DEVICE_Y / BIT _DEVICE_L : valid address is inconsecutive.
Multiple Duplicate:
The next Bit address of X264 is X301 (invalid addresses X265 ~ X300 are skipped)
The next Bit address of X364 is X401.
The address of Y is the same as X.
(The Word addresses of X and Y also skip invalid addresses automatically)
C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)
It needs to use specific cable of YOKOGAWA ACE PLC.
RS-232
DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)
Controller (6 pin) (RS-232 for YOKOGAWA)
Controller (6 pin) (RS-232 for YOKOGAWA)
RXD (2) (1) TXD
TXD (3)
GND (5)
(2) RXD
(5) GND Top View
Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series
1-136 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007
This page intentionally left blank.